JP7072248B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a jackpot game is widely known when a jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of a game ball flowing down on the game board surface into a starting port, etc., and the jackpot determination process determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. Has been done. In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine, for example, as described in Patent Document 1 below, the number (detection value) of the gaming balls detected by the detection sensor (detection means) for detecting the entry of the gate reaches the threshold value. There is something that is judged to be abnormal based on.

Further, some of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machines can arbitrarily change the probability of determining a jackpot in the jackpot determination process by changing the set value, for example.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-358525

By the way, in a gaming machine whose set value can be changed, if there is only one threshold value of the detection value detected by the detection means capable of performing a predetermined detection, the probability of determining a jackpot is changed. There is a possibility that the abnormality in the gaming machine cannot be properly determined by the detection by the detection means.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine capable of determining an abnormality in a gaming machine whose set value can be appropriately changed.

The gaming machine of the present invention
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for whether or not a jackpot is performed is performed in a predetermined determination process, and if the determination process determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, a gaming control means capable of controlling a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided. In the pachinko machine
Equipped with a detection means capable of performing a predetermined detection,
The game control means is
It is possible to change to one selected setting value from a plurality of setting values including the first setting value and the second setting value having a higher probability of being determined as a big hit in the determination process than the first setting value.
Based on the fact that the detection value by the detection means reaches a predetermined threshold value, it is possible to determine an abnormality in the gaming machine.
The threshold has a plurality of thresholds, and there are a plurality of thresholds.
When the game control means changes from the first set value to the second set value, the first threshold value is changed to a second threshold value different from the first threshold value among the plurality of threshold values. It is a gaming machine characterized by the fact that it may be used.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to determine an abnormality in a gaming machine whose set value can be appropriately changed.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the gaming machine frame provided in the gaming machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board provided in the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the part A shown in FIG. 4, and is the figure which shows the display which is provided with the said gaming machine. It is an enlarged view around the big prize device provided in the gaming machine, (A) is a figure when a distribution member is in the first state, and (B) is a view when the distribution member is in the second state. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side of the gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the back side of the gaming machine which concerns on a comparative example. In the comparative example, it is an electric circuit diagram for demonstrating the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit inspection of the comparative example. In this embodiment, it is an electric circuit diagram for demonstrating the electric power supplied between a power supply unit, a payout control board, and a game control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the time of the in-circuit inspection of this embodiment. It is a hit type judgment table. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "3". It is a jackpot determination table to be used, (D) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "4", (E) is a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "5", and (F) is a setting. It is a jackpot determination table used when the value is "6". (A) is a reach determination table, (B) is a normal symbol hit detection table, and (C) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an opening pattern determination table of the electric chew. (A) is a perspective view showing a game control board and a game control board case, and (B) is a front view showing a game control board and a game control board case. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the game control board and the game control board case. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 21B, and FIG. 21B is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 21B. It is a front view which shows the game control board and the game control board case. It is a front view which shows the 7-segment display. It is a table showing the types of operations that can be performed when the power is turned on. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of the effect mode when the setting confirmation operation is performed through the setting change mode transition operation to the RAM clear switch operation. It is a figure which shows the electric circuit around the microcomputer for game control. (A) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the rotation position, and (B) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the middle of operation from the rotation position to the standby position. , (C) is a diagram showing an electric circuit when the setting key cylinder is in the standby position. It is a rear view of the inner frame. (A) is a diagram showing a case where an error display is executed on the 7-segment display, and (B) is an operation suggestion image on the display screen, an error sound output from the speaker, and a frame lamp and a board lamp. It is a figure which shows the error light emission mode of. It is a figure for demonstrating that the display mode is switched at a specific time time after the initial display is executed on a 7-segment display. It is a figure for demonstrating the case where the 1st pre-base, the 2nd pre-base and the 3rd pre-base are not yet memorized. It is a figure which shows 9 kinds of staging symbols (from the 1st staging symbol to the 9th staging symbol). (A) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "1", (B) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "2", and (C) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "3". It is a staging symbol lottery table used at times, (D) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "4", and (E) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is "5". (F) is a staging symbol lottery table used when the set value is “6”. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol setting suggestion effect which is executed when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the loss mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the high setting suggestion effect performed at the time of SP reach loss. Error detection command specific table. It is a table showing the threshold value for the number of winnings in the electric chew from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning. (A) is a time chart for explaining the number of winnings in the electric chew from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning when the set value "1" is set in the non-time saving state. B) is a time chart for explaining the number of winnings in the electric chew from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning when the set value "6" is set in the non-time saving state. It is a figure for demonstrating the case where the electric chew abnormal prize is made. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing. It is a flowchart of setting change mode processing. It is a flowchart of setting value confirmation mode processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power failure recovery. It is a flowchart of error mode processing. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process on the main side. It is a flowchart of security control processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a gate passing process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2. It is a flowchart of base arithmetic processing. It is a flowchart of a base display process. It is a flowchart of a base display process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a distribution member control process. It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a receive interrupt process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a variation effect start process. It is a flowchart of a staging symbol selection process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect pattern selection process.

1. 1. Structure of Game Machine The pachinko game machine PY1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is described as a direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is described as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. do.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 2 constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and includes an outer frame 22, an inner frame 21, and a front door 23 (front frame). The outer frame 22 is a vertically rectangular frame body that forms an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The inner frame 21 is arranged inside the outer frame 22 and is a vertically rectangular frame body to which the game board 1 described later is attached. The front door 23 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21, and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 1. The front door 23 is a portion facing the player and is decorated in various ways.

The gaming machine frame 2 is configured to include a hinge portion 24 on the left end side. The hinge portion 24 allows the front door 23 to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21, and the inner frame 21 to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 22 and the front door 23, respectively. It has become. An opening 23a is formed in the center of the front door 23, and a transparent transparent plate 23t is attached to the opening 23a so that the player can visually recognize the game area 6 described later. The transparent plate 23t is a glass plate in this embodiment, but may be a transparent synthetic resin plate. That is, the transparent plate 23t may be such that the game area 6 can be visually recognized from the front.

In the gaming machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 is regarded as corresponding to the "base frame portion", the inner frame 21 and the front door 23 can be regarded as corresponding to the "front frame portion". Further, in the gaming machine frame 2, if the outer frame 22 and the inner frame 21 are regarded as corresponding to the "base frame portion", the front door 23 can be regarded as corresponding to the "front frame portion".

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the front door 23 has a handle 72k (game ball driving means) for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a rotation angle, and a ball hitting dish for storing the game ball (a ball hitting dish). An upper plate) 34 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 35 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 34 are provided. Further, the front door 23 is provided with an effect button (input unit) 40k and a select button 42k that can be operated by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. The select button (cross key) 42k is composed of an up direction button, a down direction button, a left direction button, and a right direction button. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 212 (abnormality notification means) and a speaker for outputting sound (not shown in FIG. 1).

The gaming board 1 shown in FIG. 4 is attached to the gaming machine frame 2. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 1 is formed with a game area 6 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the handle 72k flows down is surrounded by a rail member 62. Further, the game board 1 is provided with a large number of decorative board lamps 54 (abnormality notification means). Further, in the game area 6, a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The game board 1 includes a plate-shaped member arranged on the front side and a back unit (various control boards described later, an image display device 50 (abnormality notification means), a unit for attaching a harness, etc.) arranged on the rear side. Is integrated.

Further, an image display device 50 (effect display means, image display means), which is a liquid crystal display device, is provided near the center of the game area 6. The image display device may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device. The display screen 50a (display unit) of the image display device 50 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol EZ (decorative symbol) synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. .. The effect of displaying the effect symbol EZ is called the effect symbol change effect. The staging pattern variation effect may be referred to as "decorative pattern variation effect" or simply "variation effect". The effect symbol display area is composed of, for example, three effect symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol EZ1 is displayed in the left effect symbol display area, the middle effect symbol EZ2 is displayed in the middle effect symbol display area, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is displayed in the right effect symbol display area.

Each of the staging symbols EZ is composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 50 is a first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 81a and the second special symbol display 81b, which will be described later, by combining the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3. And the result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the big hit lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, if a big hit is won, the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with doublets such as "777". In addition, if it is out of alignment, the staging symbol EZ is stopped and displayed with a random eye such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, the player generally does not grasp the result of the big hit lottery by the first special figure display 81a or the second special figure display 81b, but by the image display device 50. The position of the effect symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol EZ, for example, there is a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction.

In the image display device 50, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect using the effect symbol EZ as described above, the jackpot effect performed in parallel with the big hit game (special game state) and the demo effect for waiting for customers (customer waiting effect). ) Etc. are displayed on the display screen 50a. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol EZ such as numbers, an effect image other than the effect symbol EZ such as a background image and a character image is also displayed.

Further, the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a hold icon display area for displaying the hold icon HA (effect hold image) according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later. The display screen 50a of the image display device 50 has a hold icon display area for displaying the hold icon HB (effect hold image) according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. By displaying the hold icon HA, the player can easily indicate to the player the number of stored first special figure holds displayed on the first special figure hold display 83a, which will be described later. By displaying the hold icon HB, the player can easily indicate to the player the number of stored first special figure holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 83b, which will be described later.

A center frame 61 (inner side wall portion) is arranged near the center of the game area 6 and in front of the image display device 50. At the lower part of the center frame 61, stages 61s are formed which can guide the game ball rolling on the upper surface to the first starting port 11 described later. Further, a warp (not shown) is provided on the left side of the center frame 61 to allow the game ball to flow in from the entrance and to flow out the game ball from the exit to the stage 61s. Further, a movable board 55k that can move up and down is provided on the upper part of the center frame 61. The board movable body 55k can be moved from the origin position above the display screen 50a to the effect position overlapping the center of the display screen 50a in the front-rear direction.

Below the image display device 50 in the game area 6, a first start winning device 11D provided with a first start port 11 (ball entry port) at which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change is provided. The first starting port 11 is also referred to as a first ball entry port, a fixed ball entry port, a first starting winning opening, and a first starting area. Further, the first start winning device 11D is also referred to as a first ball winning means, a fixed ball winning means, and a first starting winning device. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery, that is, determination of acquisition of a big hit random number or the like).

Further, below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a normal variable winning device (ordinary electric accessory so-called electric chew) 12D provided with a second starting port 12 (ball entry port) is provided. The second starting opening 12 is also referred to as a second entry opening, a variable entry opening, a second starting winning opening, and a second starting area. The electric chew 12D is also referred to as a second ball entry means, a variable ball entry means, and a second start winning device. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery).

The electric chew 12D includes an electric chew opening / closing member 12k (ball entry opening / closing member) that takes an open state (second aspect) and a closed state (first aspect), and is second by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k. It opens and closes the starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is driven by the electric chew solenoid 12s described later. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12, and when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 12. Become. That is, the second starting port 12 is a starting port in which the ease of entering the game ball can be changed. In addition, if the electric chew makes it easier to enter the ball into the second starting port when the electric chew opening / closing member is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, the electric chew is the first when it is in the closed state. 2 It does not have to be impossible to enter the ball into the starting port.

Further, on the right side of the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a first large winning device (special electric accessory) 14D provided with the first large winning opening 14 is provided. The first large winning opening 14 is also referred to as the first special winning opening (special winning section). Further, the first large winning device 14D is also referred to as a first attacker (AT), a first special winning means, and a first special variable winning device. The first large winning device 14D includes a first AT opening / closing member 14k (special winning opening opening / closing member) that takes an open state (first state) and a closed state (second state), and the operation of the first AT opening / closing member 14k causes the first. It opens and closes one big winning opening 14. The first AT opening / closing member 14k is driven by the first AT solenoid 14s, which will be described later. The first large winning opening 14 allows a game ball to enter only when the first AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state.

Here, in the first special winning device 14D, as shown in FIG. 6A, the specific area (V area) 16 through which the game ball passing through the first large winning opening 14 can pass and the non-specific area 16 are inside. Region 17 is formed. In the first large winning device 14D, a first large winning opening sensor 14a for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first large winning opening 14 is arranged upstream of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17. .. Further, in the specific area 16, a specific area sensor 16a for detecting the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is arranged. Further, in the non-specific area 17, a non-specific area sensor 17a for detecting the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 17 is arranged.

Further, the first prize-winning device 14D has a distribution member that distributes the game ball that has passed through the first prize-winning opening 14 to either the specific area 16 or the non-specific area 17, and the distribution solenoid that drives the distribution member 16k. It has 16s (see FIG. 7). The distribution member 16k is, in other words, a shutter member that opens and closes the specific area 16.

FIG. 6A shows the time when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in the first state of allowing the game ball to pass through the specific region 16. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, the game ball that has won the first special winning opening 14 passes through the specific area 16 after passing through the first large winning opening sensor 14a. The route of this game ball is called the first route.

FIG. 6B shows the non-energized state of the distribution solenoid 16s. As shown in FIG. 6B, when the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state of hindering the passage of the game ball to the specific region 16. When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, the game ball that has won the first prize opening 14 passes through the non-specific region 17 after passing through the first prize opening sensor 14a. The route of this game ball is called the second route.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the passage of the gaming ball to the specific area 16 is an opportunity to execute the jackpot game (second special game) described later. That is, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery is performed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 16. The jackpot won by the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is called a one-kind jackpot, and the jackpot won by passing a game ball to the specific area 16 is called a two-kind jackpot.

Further, above the first prize-winning device 14D, a gate 13 through which a game ball can pass is provided. The gate 13 is also referred to as a passage port or a passage area. The passage of the game ball to the gate 13 is an opportunity to execute a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number)) for determining whether or not to open the electric chew 12D. Further, a plurality of general winning openings 10 are provided in the lower part of the game area 6. Further, at the lowermost portion of the game area 6, an out port 19 is provided to discharge a game ball that has been driven into the game area 6 but has not won a prize in any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6.

Further, in the upper right of the first large winning opening 14 in the game area 6, a second large winning device (second special variable winning device, special winning means) 15D provided with a second large winning opening (special winning opening) 15 is located. It is provided. The second special winning device 15D includes a second AT opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member) 15k, and opens and closes the second special winning opening 15 by the operation of the second AT opening / closing member 15k. The second AT opening / closing member 15k is driven by the second AT solenoid 15s (see FIG. 7). The second large winning opening 15 allows a game ball to enter only when the second AT opening / closing member 15k is open.

In the game area 6 in which various winning openings and the like are arranged, the left game area 6L (first game area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area 6R (second game area) on the right side are arranged. There is. The method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6L is called left-handed hitting. On the other hand, a method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6R is called right-handed hitting. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing left-handed is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing right-handed is called the first flow path R1. , The second flow path R2.

A first starting port 11, a general winning port 10, an electric chew 12D, and an out port 19 are provided on the first flow path R1. By driving the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10. Since the gate is not arranged on the first flow path R1, the electric chew 12D is not opened when left-handed.

On the other hand, on the second flow path R2, a gate 13, a first big winning device 14D, a second big winning device 15D, an electric chew 12D, and an out port 19 are provided. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2, the player can pass through the gate 13 and win a prize in the second starting port 12, the first large winning opening 14, and the second large winning opening 15. Can be aimed at.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a display device 8 is arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 1. As shown in FIG. 5, the indicators 8 include a first special symbol display 81a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 81b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol. A normal map display 82 for variably displaying (normal map) is included. The first special symbol is also referred to as a first special figure or special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as a second special figure or special figure 2. In addition, ordinary patterns are also called ordinary patterns.

Further, in the display group 8, the operation hold of the first special figure hold display 83a and the second special figure display 81b for displaying the number of stored operations of the first special figure display 81a (first special figure hold) is displayed. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 83b that displays the number of stored items (second special figure hold), and a normal figure hold indicator 84 that displays the number of stored items of the operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal figure display 82. It has been.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol (special symbol). Further, the first special figure display 81a and the second special figure display 81b may be collectively referred to as a special figure display 81. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 83a and the second special figure hold indicator 83b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 83. In addition, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold.

In the special symbol display 81, a special symbol (identification symbol) is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped and displayed, so that a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 (special symbol lottery, The result of the jackpot lottery) will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), the opening pattern is set according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed (that is, the type of the winning jackpot). A jackpot game (an example of a special game) that opens the second big winning opening 15 is performed. The opening pattern of the big winning opening in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, the special figure display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. be. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left 1, 2, The jackpot symbol with the 5th and 6th LEDs lit is displayed. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost pattern. The lost symbol is not a specific special symbol. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. This is the aspect. It should be noted that the variable display mode may be any mode such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, if there is a winning (winning) of a game ball in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the value of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning (numerical information). , The determination information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 described later. Specifically, if a prize is won in the first starting port 11, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 105a, which will be described later, as a first special figure hold, and if a prize is won in the second starting port 12, the second special figure is held. As a figure hold, it is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 105b described later. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 105, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4", respectively.

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 105 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special figure hold means that the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of such special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 83. Specifically, each of the special figure hold display 83 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 13. The normal symbol display 82 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the second start opening 12 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Auxiliary games are played. The opening pattern of the second starting port 12 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see FIG. 5), and displays a normal symbol according to the result of a normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. It should be noted that the normal loss symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, that both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the variable display mode may be any mode such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode).

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a game ball passes through the gate 13, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 106 described later as a normal figure hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 106, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4".

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 106 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine PY1, if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 13 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 84. Specifically, the normal figure hold display 84 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a game control board 100 (main control board) that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and an effect executed as the game progresses. It is provided with an effect control board 120 (sub control board) for controlling the game ball, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game ball, and the like. The game control board 100 constitutes a main control unit together with the payout control board 170, and the staging control board 120 constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 140 and the sub drive board 162 described later.

The sub control unit is provided with at least an effect control board 120, and can control a game effect using an effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, panel lamp 54, panel movable body 55k, frame lamp 212, etc.). Just do it.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is provided with a power supply unit 190. The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) inputs an AC24V power supply from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and uses various voltages (DC5V, DC12V, DC18V, DC24V) required for the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on the AC24V power supply. , DC37V) to generate electric power (power supply). The DC5V power is mainly used as a power source for various integrated circuits (ICs). Further, the electric power of DC12V is mainly used as a power source for various sensors and solenoids. Further, the electric power of DC18V is mainly used as a power source for various LEDs. Further, the electric power of DC24V and the electric power of DC37V are mainly used as a power source for the motor (driving means) for staging.

The power supply unit 190 (power supply unit) first supplies the generated power to the payout control board 170. Then, the generated electric power is supplied to the game control board 100 and the staging control board 120 via the payout control board 170. Further, the generated electric power is supplied to other devices via the payout control board 170, the game control board 100, and the staging control board 120. In this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is not provided with a backup power supply circuit. This point will be described in detail later.

A power switch 195 (power switching unit) is connected to the power supply unit 190. The power switch 195 can be switched to an on state (ON state) in which power can be supplied based on the power supply of AC24V supplied from the outside, or a cutoff state (OFF state) in which power cannot be supplied. That is, the power switch 195 switches the power on or off by the ON operation or the OFF operation. When the power switch 195 is turned ON, the power switch 195 is turned on, and when the power switch 195 is turned OFF, the power switch 195 is turned on. It becomes a cutoff state. When the power switch 195 is in the ON state, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-on state, and when the power switch 195 is in the OFF state, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-off state.

Further, the power supply unit 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 191 (RAM clear operation means) that can be pressed and operated. The RAM clear switch 191 is a game information (for example, a game state information such as a high probability state, special feature) stored in the game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 (game control means) described later. Information such as the result of holding the figure and determining whether the jackpot is successful or not) is to be deleted. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM clear switch 191 is on the power supply unit 190 arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (specifically, the power supply switch 195 in the power supply unit 190 when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side. It is provided on the right side of). Therefore, the RAM clear switch 191 cannot be operated unless the employee of the game hall or the like can open the game machine frame 2. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 191 is an operation means that cannot be operated by a player. The RAM clear switch 191 is a tact switch, and when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 191 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. The state in which the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed is referred to as an ON state of the RAM clear switch 191, and the state in which the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed is referred to as an OFF state of the RAM clear switch 191. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is provided on the power supply unit 190, but the arrangement location of the RAM clear switch 191 can be changed as appropriate, and is provided, for example, on the game control board 100 or on a dedicated board. Is also good.

As shown in FIG. 7, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. The game control microcomputer 101 (main control means, game control means) includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM 104 used as a work memory, and the like. It includes a game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the game ROM 103, and a game I / O (Input / Output) port unit 118 for inputting / outputting data and signals. The gaming RAM 104 (storage means) includes the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit 105 (first special figure holding storage unit 105a and second special figure holding storage unit 105b), the normal figure holding storage unit 106, and other settings described later. A value information storage unit 107 and a base information storage unit 108 are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the game control board 100 is provided with a 7-segment display 300 and a setting key cylinder 180. The 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 7, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via the relay board 110. Therefore, a signal is input to the game control board 100 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the game control board 100 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 11a, a second start port sensor 12a (detection means), a gate sensor 13a, a first special winning opening sensor 14a, a second large winning opening sensor 15a, and a specific area sensor. The 16a, the non-specific area sensor 17a, the general winning opening sensor 10a, and the discharging port sensor 18a are connected.

The first start port sensor 11a is provided in the first start port 11 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a is provided in the second starting port 12 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a is provided in the gate 13 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The first large winning opening sensor 14a is provided in the first large winning opening 14, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 14. The second large winning opening sensor 15a is provided in the second large winning opening 15, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 15. The specific area sensor 16a is provided in the first large winning opening 14, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16. The non-specific area sensor 17a is provided in the first large winning opening 14, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 17. The general winning opening sensor 10a is provided in the general winning opening 10 and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10.

The discharge port sensor 18a is provided in a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and detects the game ball that has passed through the discharge port. The discharge port is provided at the lower end of the inner frame 21, and the game ball driven into the game area 6 has a first start port 11, a second start port 12, a first large winning opening 14, and a second large winning opening. After entering any of the opening 15, the general winning opening 10, and the out opening 19, the ball finally passes through the ejection port. Therefore, by detecting the game ball that has passed through the discharge port with the discharge port sensor 18a, it is possible to detect all the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6. The number of all game balls driven into the game area 6 can be referred to as the total number of fired balls. Further, since the total number of launched balls is the same as the number of all the gaming balls discharged outside the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it can also be called the number of discharged balls, the total number of discharged balls, or the number of out balls.

Further, a door opening detection sensor 200, a magnetic detection sensor 201, a radio wave detection sensor 202, and an impact detection sensor 203 are connected to the main control board 80 in order to detect fraud by a player or the like. The door opening detection sensor 200 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 2 (opening of the front door 23 or opening of the front door 23 and the inner frame 21). The magnetic detection sensor 201 detects a change in magnetic flux density that occurs when a player or the like brings a magnetic member (magnet or the like) close to the magnetic member. With the magnetic detection sensor 201, for example, it is possible to detect fraud such that a game ball is attracted to each of the starting openings 11, 12 and the large winning openings 14, 15 by using a magnetic member. In addition to one magnetic detection sensor 201, a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 201 may be arranged around the starting ports 11 and 12 and around the winning openings 14 and 15. The radio wave detection sensor 202 detects electromagnetic waves in a specific frequency region generated when a player or the like brings a radio wave generating device close to the sensor. With the radio wave detection sensor 202, for example, it is possible to detect fraud such that the start port sensors 11a and 12a and the grand prize opening sensors 14a and 15a detect an abnormality by using a radio wave generating device. In addition to one radio wave detection sensor 202, a plurality of radio wave detection sensors 202 may be arranged around the start port sensors 11a and 12a and the big prize opening sensors 14a and 15a. The impact detection sensor 203 detects the acceleration generated when a player or the like applies an impact to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The impact detection sensor 203 can detect, for example, fraud in which a player or the like hits or shakes the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It should be noted that the impact detection sensor 203 may be arranged not only in one but also in a plurality of locations where an impact is likely to be applied.

Further, as solenoids, an electric chew solenoid 12s and a first AT solenoid 14s are connected. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The first AT solenoid 14s drives the first AT opening / closing member 14k of the first prize-winning device 14D. The second AT solenoid 15s drives the second AT opening / closing member 5k of the second prize-winning device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the first prize-winning device 14D.

Further, the game control board 100 includes a special figure display 81 (first special figure display 81a and a second special figure display 81b), a normal figure display 82, and a special figure hold display 83 (first special figure hold display). The device 83a, the second special figure hold indicator 83b), and the normal figure hold indicator 84 are connected. That is, the display control of these indicators 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands and signals to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 170 includes a card unit CU (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73. In addition to being connected, the launch device 72 is connected via the launch control circuit 175. The launcher 72 includes a handle 72k (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 170 (first control board) mounts a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) 171 that can execute a control process related to payout of a game ball according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 171 (payout control means) includes a payout ROM 173 that stores a program for controlling payout, a payout RAM 174 that is used as a work memory, and a payout ROM 173 that executes a program stored in the payout ROM 173. A CPU 172 and a payout I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 178 for inputting / outputting data and signals are included. The payout ROM 173 may be externally attached.

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73 m of the prize ball payout device 73 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the card unit CU connected to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to drive the prize ball. Pay out or pay out ball rental. For example, when the game ball enters (wins) the first start port 11, the detection signal by the first start port sensor 11a is input to the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a prize ball signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 to the payout control board 170. In this case, the payout control microcomputer 171 that has received the prize ball signal drives the launch solenoid 72s via the launch control circuit 175 based on the prize ball number information stored in the payout ROM 173 to start the first operation. Prize balls (for example, 3 pieces) are paid out based on the entry into the mouth 11. At this time, the game ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for counting, and the detection signal by the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170. Here, in this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit 179 is provided on the payout control board 170. This point will be described in detail later.

When the player operates the handle 72k (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 72, the touch switch 72a detects contact with the handle 72k, and the firing volume 72b detects the amount of rotation of the handle 72k. Then, the launch solenoid 72s is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 72b. In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the effect control board 120. The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the staging control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 8, the staging control board 120 is mounted with a staging control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “staging control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the staging of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The staging control microcomputer 121 executes a program stored in the staging ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the staging as the game progresses, the staging RAM 124 that is used as the work memory, and the staging ROM 123. A staging CPU 122 and a staging I / O port unit 138 for inputting / outputting data and signals are included. The effect RAM 124 is provided with a setting value flag 125, which will be described later. The production ROM 123 may be externally attached. As described above, the staging control board 120 is adapted to be supplied with electric power (for example, electric power of 5V DC) from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the image control board 140 is connected to the staging control board 120, and the sub drive board 162 (sub drive circuit) is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 (effect control means) of the effect control board 120 causes the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the display of the image display device 50 based on the command received from the game control board 100. The effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a control signal via the image input circuit 147 of the image control board 140. Then, the image CPU 141 transmits a control signal to the image display device 50 via the image output circuit 148 of the image control board 140.

The image RAM 143 of the image control board 140 is a memory for expanding image data. The image ROM 142 of the image control board 140 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 50, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns) and a background. Image data such as images are stored. The image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads image data from the image ROM 142 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

A speaker 620 (sound output means) is connected to the image control board 140. The effect control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 620 via the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100. The voice CPU 149 controls the voice of the speaker 620 via the voice control circuit 150 based on a command from the image CPU 141. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 620 is stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120. However, the acoustic data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Although the image control board 140 is made to perform voice control of the speaker 620, a voice control board may be provided separately from the image control board 140, and the voice control board may be made to perform voice control of the speaker 620. In this case, the voice control board may be connected to the staging control board 120, or may be connected to the staging control board 120 via the image control board 140. Further, a CPU may be mounted on a voice control board, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. .. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp, and emits light from each lamp according to the light emission pattern data. Control. The data stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the drive of the board movable body 55k via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 55k, and drives the motor to drive the panel movable body 55k according to the operation pattern data. I do. The data stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120 is used to create the operation pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted on the sub drive board 162, and in that case, the CPU may be used to control the lighting of the lamp and the drive control of the movable panel 55k. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the sub drive board 162, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, an input unit detection sensor (effect button detection sensor) 40a and a select button detection sensor 42a are connected to the effect control board 120. The input unit detection sensor 40a detects that the input unit 40k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the input unit 40k is pressed, a detection signal is output from the input unit detection sensor 40a to the staging control board 120. The select button detection sensor 42a detects that the select button 42k (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 42k is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection sensor 42a to the staging control board 120.

Note that FIGS. 7 and 8 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and not only the substrates shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 are provided. Except for the game control board 100, any plurality of boards shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 may be configured as one board, or one board shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. 3. Power supply unit Next, the power supply unit 190 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 shows the power supply unit 190 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 10 shows the power supply board 190X of the comparative example. Hereinafter, the power supply unit 190 and the power supply board 190X will be compared and described.

The power supply board 190X is generally used as a power supply unit in pachinko gaming machines. When the power supply board 190X is used as the power supply unit, the power supply board 190X becomes a test target board. Therefore, it is not permitted to mount surface mount components on the power supply board 190X, and there is a situation that lead components (Dip components) with lead wires must be mounted. Further, most of the power supply boards 190X are provided with a backup power supply circuit, and the backup power supply circuit can supply backup power to the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 at the time of power failure. However, the power supply board 190X provided with the backup power supply circuit peculiar to the pachinko gaming machine becomes a custom-made product. From the above, there is a problem that the power supply board 190X cannot replace the lead component with a surface mount component, and by providing a backup power supply circuit, it has to have a relatively large configuration as a custom-made product. rice field.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 is used instead of the power supply board 190X. The power supply unit 190 is modularized and is a general-purpose product. Therefore, when the power supply unit 190 is used as the power supply unit, the power supply unit 190 is not a test target substrate. Therefore, not only the lead component but also the surface mount component can be mounted on the power supply unit 190. As a result, the power supply unit 190 can be made smaller (compact) by replacing the conventional lead component with a surface mount component. Further, since the power supply unit 190 is a general-purpose product, it does not have a backup power supply circuit peculiar to pachinko gaming machines. This makes it possible to make the power supply unit 190 even smaller.

Thus, as can be seen from the comparison between the power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 9 and the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 10, the power supply unit 190 can be configured to be smaller than the power supply board 190X. In the case of the power supply board 190X, it is necessary to mount lead components that have become difficult to obtain in recent years, but in the case of the power supply unit 190, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to mount lead components that are difficult to obtain.

Next, the arrangement of the power supply unit 190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. A payout control board 170 is arranged behind the power supply unit 190, and at least a part of the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the transparent outer cover 25 provided behind the game board 1. Therefore, the payout control board 170 can be said to be a "frame-side board" provided in the game machine frame 2 (inner frame 21) instead of the game board 1. The payout control board 170 is housed in a payout control board case 170A that does not interfere with the visibility of the payout control microcomputer 171.

On the other hand, the game control board 100, the above-mentioned effect control board 120, the sub drive board 162, and the image control board 140 are arranged inside the outer cover 25 of the game board 1. Therefore, the game control board 100, the staging control board 120, the sub drive board 162, and the image control board 140 can be said to be "board-side boards" provided on the game board 1 instead of the game machine frame 2. The game control board (main board) 100 is housed in a game control board case (main board case) 100A that does not interfere with the visibility of the game control microcomputer 101. The game control board 100 and the game control board case 100A constitute a game control board unit (main control board unit) 100B. The game control board unit 100B will be described later.

In this way, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are arranged outside the game board 1 and at a short distance behind the inner frame 21. In particular, since the payout control board 170 is arranged so that a part of the payout control board 170 overlaps the power supply unit 190 in the front-rear direction, the wiring is easily connected. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3 (see FIG. 13) described later. As a result, the DC5V power generated by the power supply unit 190 is first supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the power supply unit 190 is arranged immediately in front of the payout control board 170 so that most of the power supply unit 190 is not exposed. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the back side, the power supply unit 190 is hidden behind (front) the payout control board 170 and is almost invisible. Therefore, for the power supply unit 190, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the other control boards except for the payout control board 170 which is arranged immediately behind.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100 are not directly connected by a harness, but the payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4 (see FIG. 13) described later. As a result, the electric power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the payout control board 170, and then supplied from the payout control board 170 to the game control board 100. In this way, it is possible to supply DC5V power to the game control board 100 while simplifying the wiring.

In short, conventionally, a method of branching the DC5V electric power generated by the power supply unit 190 (power supply board 190X) into a method toward the payout control board 170 and a method toward the game control board 100 is common. However, in this method, as shown in FIG. 9, when the power supply unit 190 is arranged so as to be hidden in front of the payout control board 170, it is difficult to connect the power supply unit 190 and the game control board 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the wiring, the game control board 100, which is a board-side board, is connected to the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, which is a frame-side board. As a result, the electric power of DC5V generated by the power supply unit 190 is once supplied to the game control board 100 via the payout control board 170, and a new power supply relationship is established.

Here, the merits of the case where the power supply unit 190 can be configured small will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, the power supply unit 190 is arranged on the lower rear side of the inner frame 21. The power supply unit 190 shown in FIG. 9 can be made shorter in the vertical direction than the power supply board 190X shown in FIG. 10 by making it compact. Thereby, the power supply unit 190 having a short length in the vertical direction can be arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

By the way, the front of the power supply unit 190 is a lower portion of the front door 23. The lower portion of the front door 23 is an operation mechanism unit 210 (see FIG. 1) including a ball hitting plate 34 (upper plate), a lower plate 35, an input unit 40k (effect button), a select button 42k, and the like. Therefore, as described above, when the power supply unit 190 having a short vertical length is arranged on the lower side of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the vertical length of the operation mechanism unit 210 is shortened and the operation mechanism unit is shortened. The upper end position of 210 can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to expand the game board 1 (see FIG. 4) downward and lower the lower end position of the game area 6. As a result, there is an advantage that the game entertainment can be improved by expanding the game area 6.

4. Electric circuit between the power supply unit, the payout control board, and the game control board Next, the electric circuit DK1 (see FIG. 13) between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of this embodiment will be described. .. However, before explaining the electric circuit DK1 of this embodiment, the electric circuit DKX between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of the comparative example will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the comparative example, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by the harness HN1. The connector CN1 at one end of the harness HN1 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN2 at the other end of the harness HN1 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN1 is provided with a wiring h1 for supplying electric power of DC5V (specific voltage) from the power supply unit 190 (hereinafter, also referred to as a “normal power supply”) and a wiring h2 serving as a ground wire. In addition to the wiring h1 and the wiring h2, the harness HN1 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying DC12V power from the power supply unit 190, but the description thereof will be omitted.

In the payout control board 170, there is a power line a1 (specific power line) between the connector CN2 and the branch portion j1. The power line a1 is connected to the wiring h1 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2. Further, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line a2 connected to the ground G. The power line a2 is connected to the wiring h2 of the harness HN1 via the connector CN2.

A filter (noise removing means) NF1 is connected to the connector CN2 side of the power line a1. The filter NF1 is composed of two coils (inductors) and one capacitor, and is a so-called three-element type low-pass filter. In the filter NF1, the two coils are connected in series with the power line a1. Further, one coil is connected in parallel to the power line a1. That is, one side of the capacitor is connected to the power line a1 and the other side of the capacitor is connected to the ground G. This filter NF1 removes high frequency noise from the power of DC5V supplied by the power line a1.

Further, the capacitor CA1 is connected in parallel to the branch portion j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the filter NF1. This capacitor CA1 is an electrolytic capacitor having a relatively large capacitance (for example, a capacitance of 470 μF). The electrolytic capacitor is a capacitor in which the metal oxidized by the electrolytic solution is used as an anode, the film formed on the surface of the metal is used as a dielectric, and the electrolytic solution is used as a cathode. This capacitor CA1 prevents the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large.

Further, the capacitor CA2 is connected in parallel to the branch portion j1 side of the power line a1 with respect to the capacitor CA1. The capacitor CA2 is a ceramic capacitor having a smaller capacitance than the capacitor CA1 (for example, the capacitance is 0.1 μF). The ceramic capacitor is a capacitor made of ceramic (metal oxide sintered body) as a dielectric. This capacitor CA2 removes high frequency noise from a normal power supply on the power line a1.

There is a power line c1 (first branch power line) from the branch portion j1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line c1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply (power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190) is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring h1, the power line a1, and the power line c1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the normal power supply at the normal time.

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN2. The connector CN3 at one end of the harness HN2 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN4 at the other end of the harness HN2 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN2 is provided with a wiring h3 for supplying normal power and a wiring h4 for supplying backup power, which will be described later. In addition to the wiring h3 and the wiring h4, the harness HN2 is provided with, for example, wiring for supplying DC12V power from the power supply unit 190, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control board 170 has a power line b1 from the branch portion j1 to the wiring h3 of the harness HN2, and the resistor T1 is connected in series to the branch portion j1 side of the power line b1. The resistor T1 suppresses the current from the branch portion j1 to the resistor T1. Further, a diode DO1 is connected to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the resistor T1. The diode DO1 allows a current flow from the diode DO1 toward the connector CN3 side, while restricting a current flow from the diode DO1 toward the branch portion j1 side. With this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) described later from going from the diode DO1 to the branch portion j1.

Further, a capacitor CA3 is connected in parallel to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the diode DO1. The capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor having a rated voltage of 5.5V and having a capacitance much larger than that of the capacitors CA1 and CA2 (for example, the capacitance is 0.33F). The electric double layer capacitor is a capacitor whose operating principle is an electric double layer generated at the interface between activated carbon and an electrolytic solution. This capacitor CA3 releases the stored charge when the normal power supply is not supplied from the power supply unit 190 to the Vc terminal of the payout control board 170 at the time of power failure. As a result, it is possible to supply DC5V power (hereinafter, also referred to as “backup power supply”) to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 described later and the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 described later.

Further, the capacitor CA4 is connected in parallel to the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the capacitor CA3. This capacitor CA4 is a ceramic capacitor similar to the above-mentioned capacitor CA2. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied by the power line b1.

Further, there is a branch portion j2 on the connector CN3 side of the power line b1 with respect to the capacitor CA4. Then, there is a power line b2 from the branch portion j2 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line b2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line b1 and the power line b2 by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can operate based on the backup power source even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the information related to the payout stored in the payout RAM 174 from being erased.

Further, the power line b1 is connected to the wiring h3 via the connector CN3. The wiring h3 is connected to the power line d1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the backup power supply is supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. .. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the backup power source even when the power is cut off. That is, it is possible to prevent the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 from being erased. The power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1 correspond to the "second branch power line".

Further, the payout control board 170 has a power line c2 extending from the branch portion j1, and the power line c2 is connected to the wiring h4 via the connector CN3. The wiring h4 is connected to the power line d2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN4. The power line d2 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the electric power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190 is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring h1, the electric power line a1, the electric power line c2, the wiring h4, and the electric power line d2. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can operate based on the normal power supply (power of DC5V from the power supply unit 190) at the normal time.

As described above, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the payout control board 170, the normal power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line c1 extending from the branch portion j1. be. Further, the electric power line b1 extending from the branch portion j1 can supply a normal power supply to the capacitor CA3 and store an electric charge in the capacitor CA3. When the power is cut off, the backup power supply can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line b1 and the power line b2 extending from the branch portion j1. In this way, by using the branch of the power line c1 and the power line b1 and the power line b2, it is possible to supply the normal power supply and the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 with a simple circuit configuration.

Further, according to the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example, the capacitor CA3 provided on the payout control board 170 supplies the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line b1 and the power line b2 at the time of power failure. In addition to being possible, it can be supplied to the game control microcomputer 101 of the game control board 100 via the power line b1, the wiring h3, and the power line d1. That is, the backup power can be supplied to the payout control microcomputer 171 and the game control microcomputer 101 without providing a capacitor as a backup power supply means on the power supply board. Therefore, the power supply unit 190 (see FIG. 8) can be used instead of the power supply board 190X (see FIG. 9), and a new backup power supply relationship can be constructed.

By the way, the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example has the following problems. First, in-circuit inspection is performed in the manufacturing process of various control boards (electronic circuit boards) including the payout control board 170. In the in-circuit inspection, with the electronic components mounted on the board, a signal is sent to each electronic component using an in-circuit tester, and the number of components (resistor value, capacitor value, inductance value) is incorrect. It is inspected for defects, soldering openings and short circuits, lead floating, and IC malfunction. The in-circuit inspection is performed with the CPU and one-chip microcomputer removed from the board. When the in-circuit inspection is completed, a CPU or a one-chip microcomputer is mounted on the board and a function test is performed. The function test actually operates the control board and inspects whether or not the output of the electronic circuit board as a whole meets the specifications.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12, at the time of the in-circuit inspection of the comparative example, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170, and the electric power from the in-circuit tester INC is passed through the electric power line a1 and the electric power line b1. Is supplied to the capacitor CA3. As a result, the capacitor CA3 stores electric charges. However, once the charge stored in the capacitor CA3 is not immediately released. Therefore, if the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection is completed, the electric charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 may act on the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction.

In short, as a result of mounting the capacitor CA3 as a backup power supply means on the payout control board 170, there is a possibility that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction due to the electric charge remaining in the in-circuit inspection. In particular, the capacitor CA3 is an electric double layer capacitor that can store a large amount of electric charge but takes a relatively long time to release the electric charge. Therefore, electric charges tend to remain in the capacitor CA3, and as described above, there is a possibility that the payout control microcomputer 171 may malfunction.

Therefore, the electric circuit DK1 between the power supply unit 190, the payout control board 170, and the game control board 100 of the present embodiment is configured as shown in FIG. In the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 12, the description of the parts common to the configuration of the electric circuit DKX of the comparative example shown in FIG. 11 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the power supply unit 190 and the payout control board 170 are connected by a harness HN3. The connector CN5 at one end of the harness HN3 is connected to the power supply unit 190, and the connector CN6 at the other end of the harness HN3 is connected to the payout control board 170. The harness HN3 is provided with a wiring H1 for supplying DC5V power (normal power supply) from the power supply unit 190, a wiring H2 for supplying DC5V power different from the normal power supply, and a wiring H3 serving as a ground wire. Has been done.

In the payout control board 170, the power line A1 and the power line A2 are provided in parallel. The power line A1 is connected to the wiring H1 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6. As a result, normal power is supplied to the power line A1 via the wiring H1. The power line A2 is connected to the wiring H2 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6. As a result, the electric power of DC5V, which is different from the normal power supply, is supplied to the electric power line A2 via the wiring H2. Further, in the payout control board 170, there is a power line A3 connected to the ground G. The power line A3 is connected to the wiring H3 of the harness HN3 via the connector CN6.

A filter NF1 similar to the filter NF1 (see FIG. 11) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A1. With this filter NF1, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied by the power line A1. Further, in the power line A1, a capacitor CA1 similar to the capacitor CA1 (see FIG. 11) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the filter NF1. With this capacitor CA1, it is possible to prevent the voltage of DC5V from dropping when the fluctuation (load) of the current in the normal power supply becomes large. Further, in the power line A1, a capacitor CA2 similar to the capacitor CA2 (see FIG. 11) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the capacitor CA1. With this capacitor CA2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the normal power supply supplied by the power line A1.

Further, the power line A1 has a power line C1 from the branch portion J1 to the payout control microcomputer 171, and the power line C1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, and the power line C1. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 171 can be operated based on the normal power supply. The electric power line A1 and the electric power line C1 correspond to the "first specific electric power line".

The payout control board 170 and the game control board 100 are connected by a harness HN4. The connector CN7 at one end of the harness HN4 is connected to the payout control board 170, and the connector CN8 at the other end of the harness HN4 is connected to the game control board 100. The harness HN4 is provided with a wiring H4 for supplying normal power and a wiring H5 for supplying backup power.

The power line A1 is connected to the wiring H4 via the connector CN7. The wiring H4 is connected to the power line D1 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D1 is connected to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the normal power supply is supplied to the Vc terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the wiring H1, the power line A1, the wiring H4, and the power line D1. As a result, the game control microcomputer 101 can be operated based on the normal power supply.

The filter NF2 is connected to the connector CN6 side of the power line A2. The filter NF2 is the same as the filter NF1 described above. With this filter NF2, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the power of DC5V supplied from the power supply unit 190 (hereinafter, also referred to as “charging power”). The charging power is DC 5V, which is the same as the normal power supply, but is only power for storing electric charge in the capacitor CA3. Further, a resistor T1 similar to the resistor T1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected in series to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the filter NF2. With this resistor T1, it is possible to suppress the current of the charging power supplied by the power line A2. Further, a diode DO1 similar to the diode DO1 (see FIG. 10) described in the comparative example is connected to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the resistor T1. With this diode DO1, it is possible to prevent the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) from going from the diode DO1 to the connector CN6 side.

Further, a capacitor CA3 (electric double layer capacitor) similar to the capacitor CA3 (see FIG. 11) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the diode DO1. As a result, it is possible to supply a backup power source by discharging the electric charge stored in the capacitor CA3 at the time of power failure. Further, in the power line A2, a capacitor CA4 similar to the capacitor CA4 (see FIG. 11) described in the comparative example is connected in parallel to the connector CN6 side of the capacitor CA3. With this capacitor CA4, it is possible to remove high frequency noise from the backup power supply supplied by the power line A2.

Further, there is a branch portion J2 on the connector CN7 side of the power line A2 with respect to the capacitor CA4. There is a power line B1 heading from the branch portion J2 to the payout control microcomputer 171 and a power line B2 heading to the connector CN7. The power line B1 is connected to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171. Thereby, when the power is cut off, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the payout control microcomputer 171 via the power line A2 and the power line B1. The electric power line A2 and the electric power line B1 correspond to the "second specific electric power line".

Further, the power line B2 is connected to the wiring H5 via the connector CN7. The wiring H5 is connected to the power line D2 of the game control board 100 via the connector CN8. The power line D2 is connected to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101. Thereby, when the power is cut off, the backup power supply from the capacitor CA3 can be supplied to the Vb terminal of the game control microcomputer 101 via the power line A2, the power line B2, the wiring H5, and the power line D2. The portion including the capacitor CA3, the diode DO1, the power line A2, the power line B1, and the power line B2 corresponds to the "backup power supply circuit 179 (see FIG. 7)" of this embodiment.

As described above, according to the electric circuit DK1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in the payout control board 170, the power line A1 and the power line C1 (first specific power line), and the power line A2 and the power line B1 (first). (2 specific power lines) and each extend toward the payout control microcomputer 171 in a separated state. Therefore, it is possible to supply normal power to the payout control microcomputer 171 by the power line A1. Further, it is possible to supply the charging power to the capacitor CA3 by the power line A2 and store the electric charge in the capacitor CA3. When the power is cut off, the power line A2 and the power line B1 can supply the backup power supply to the payout control microcomputer 171.

Here, at the time of the in-circuit inspection of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the in-circuit tester INC is connected to the payout control board 170 with the payout control microcomputer 171 removed from the payout control board 170. At this time, the in-circuit tester INC controls so as to supply electric power to the electric power line A1 but not to supply electric power to the electric power line A2 and the electric power line B1. This makes it possible to perform in-circuit inspection without storing electric charge in the capacitor CA3. Therefore, even if the payout control microcomputer 171 is mounted on the payout control board 170 after the in-circuit inspection is completed, it is possible to prevent the charge remaining in the capacitor CA3 from acting on the payout control microcomputer 171. .. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the payout control microcomputer 171 malfunctions. Since the other effects of this embodiment are the same as those of the comparative example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

5. Explanation of big hits, etc. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, there are "big hits", "small hits", and "missing" as a result of the big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In detail, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "missing" as the result of the lottery of the first special symbol, and "big hit", "small hit", as the result of the lottery of the second special symbol. There is a "missing". That is, the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol may result in "missing". However, it is not limited to this. For example, as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol, there may be a case where there is no "missing". In this case, the lottery for the second special symbol will not result in "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81. At the time of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81. In the case of "off", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display 81.

When a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the second big winning opening 15 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of big hit) displayed as a stop "Big hit game (equivalent to the second special game). Is executed. If you win a small hit, you will get a "small hit game (equivalent to the first special game)" that opens the first big winning opening 14 with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of small hit) that is stopped and displayed. Will be executed. Then, when the game ball enters the specific area 16 in the first big winning opening 14 during the execution of the small hit game, the second big winning opening 15 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the winning small hit. The "big hit game" (second special game) is executed. The jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot winning is referred to as a type 1 jackpot game. Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage to the specific area 16 is referred to as a type 2 jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game consists of multiple round games (unit open game), an opening before the first round game is started (also referred to as OP), and an ending after the final round game is completed. (Also referred to as ED) and is included. Each round game begins with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ED. The closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit opening game is the small hit opening game in which the first large winning opening 14 is opened, the opening before the small hit opening game is started (interval before opening), and the small hit opening game is completed. Includes later ending (post-closed interval).

As a result of the special symbol lottery, if a big hit is won (that is, if one kind big hit is won), a big hit game (one kind big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 15 is executed. More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, there are "4R (round) normal jackpot", "4R time saving jackpot", and "9R time saving jackpot" as the types of jackpots. The "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the gaming state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after opening the second big winning opening 15 over 4R. The "4R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the gaming state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after opening the second big winning opening 15 over 4R. The "9R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the gaming state to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after opening the second big winning opening 15 over 9R. In each big hit, the number of times the second big winning opening 15 is opened per 1R is one, and the maximum opening time is 29.5 seconds.

In addition, "4R normal jackpot" and "4R time saving jackpot" may be won only by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, there is a possibility that the "9R time saving jackpot" will be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If the "4R normal jackpot" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the "special symbol 1_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 81a. Further, when the "4R time saving jackpot" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, "special figure 1_time saving symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 81a. Further, when the "9R time saving jackpot" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the "special figure 2_time saving symbol" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 81b.

On the other hand, as a result of the special symbol lottery, if a small hit is won, a small hit game in which the first large winning opening 14 is opened once is executed. If a game ball wins a prize in the first big prize opening 14 opened by the small hit game and the game ball passes through a specific area 16 in the first big prize device 14D, the big hit is won, and then 7R, Alternatively, a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) in which the second big winning opening 15 is opened over 9R is executed. When these two types of big hit games are executed, the opening of the first big winning opening 14 as a small hit game corresponds to the first round. Therefore, the total number of rounds at this time is 8R or 10R. The big hit game and the small hit game may be referred to as a special game. Further, in the special game, there may be a round in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times in one round.

More specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, there are "time saving small hit 1", "time saving small hit 2", "time saving small hit 3", and "normal small hit" as the types of small hits. .. For each type of small hit, a small hit game is performed, and if the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in the small hit game, a big hit game (type 2 big hit game) is performed. If the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in the small hit game, the big hit game is not executed. "Time saving small hit 1" or "time saving small hit 2" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through the specific area 16 (also referred to as V passage). On the other hand, "time saving small hit 3" and "normal small hit" are small hits that can always pass through V if the game is played by right-handed. Whether or not V can pass during the execution of the small hit game is determined by the operation pattern of the distribution member 16k and the opening pattern of the first AT opening / closing member 14k. This point will be described in detail later.

In each type of small hit game, the first big winning opening 14 is opened once for 1.6 seconds. However, the opening time in each small hit game differs depending on the type of small hit. Specifically, the time saving small hit 1 is about 4.6 seconds, the time saving small hit 2 is 21 seconds, the time saving small hit 3 and the normal small hit is 0.008 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small hit game differs depending on the type of small hit is the opening timing of the first big winning opening 14 for the distribution member 16k that has been moving in a constant motion from the start of this opening. To change. This creates a pass-open pattern in which V can pass during the execution of the small hit game and a non-pass open pattern in which V cannot pass (including substantially) during the execution of the small hit game.

Further, in the big hit game (type 2 big hit game) executed based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16, the first big winning opening 14 is opened in the opening pattern determined according to the type of the small hit. Specifically, the "time saving small hit 1" sets the maximum opening time per 1R to 29.5 seconds, and after the execution of the two-kind big hit game in which the second big winning opening 15 is opened over 7R, the game state is changed to "1" described later. It is a hit to control to "a time saving state and a high base state". However, since "time saving small hit 1" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V, such a two-kind big hit game is rarely executed.

Further, in the "time saving small hit 2", after the execution of the type 2 big hit game in which the maximum opening time per 1R is set to 29.5 seconds and the second big winning opening 15 is opened over 7R, the game state is changed to the "time saving state and" described later. It is a hit to control to "high base state". "Time saving small hit 3" sets the maximum opening time per 1R to 29.5 seconds and opens the second big winning opening 15 over 9R. It is a hit to control to "state". Further, in the "normal small hit", after the execution of the two-kind big hit game in which the maximum opening time per 1R is set to 29.5 seconds and the second big winning opening 15 is opened from the 2nd to the 10th R, the game state is changed to "" described later. It is a hit to control to "non-time saving state and low base state". It should be noted that the number of times the second big winning opening 15 is opened per 1R in the two-kind big hit game is one.

In addition, "time saving small hit 1" and "time saving small hit 2" may be won only by the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, "time saving small hit 3" and "normal small hit" may be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. When the "time saving small hit 1" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, "special drawing 1_small hit symbol 1 with time saving" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 81a. Further, when the "time saving small hit 2" is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, "special drawing 1_small hit symbol 2 with time saving" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 81a. Further, when the "time saving small hit 3" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, "special drawing 2_small hit symbol with time saving" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 81b. Further, when the "normal small hit" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the "special figure 2_small hit symbol without time reduction" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 81b.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 50% for the 4R normal jackpot and 50% for the 4R short-time jackpot. On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all 9R time-saving jackpots. In addition, the probability of distribution to each small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 99% for the time-saving small hit 1 (small hit that can pass V) and 1 for the time-saving small hit 2 (small hit that can pass V). It is%. In addition, the probability of distribution to each small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 50% for the time-saving small hit 3 (time-saving small hit that can pass V) and 50 for the normal small hit (normal small hit that can pass V). It is%.

As shown in FIG. 15, when a jackpot is won based on the lottery of Special Figure 1, a jackpot game with an actual number of rounds of 4 is executed, while a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery of Special Figure 2. In the case of winning, a jackpot game with an actual number of rounds of 9 is executed, and the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of Special Figure 1. There is. Further, when a small hit is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, "time saving small hit 1" or "time saving small hit 2" can be executed. However, since "time saving small hit 1" or "time saving small hit 2" is a small hit that is substantially impossible to pass through V, the type 2 big hit game is rarely executed. Even if two types of jackpot games are executed, the jackpot game is an eight-round jackpot game. On the other hand, if the player wins the "time saving small hit 3" or the "normal small hit" based on the lottery of Special Figure 2, it is a small hit that can pass V substantially, so such a two-kind big hit game. May be executed. This two-kind jackpot game is a 10-round jackpot game. Therefore, the lottery of the special figure 2 is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the special figure 1.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the lottery for whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit is performed based on the "big hit random number", and the lottery for the winning type is performed based on the "win type random number". As shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 include "reach random numbers" and "variable pattern random numbers" in addition to the jackpot random numbers and the hit type random numbers.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out of order. Reach is a state in which the staging symbol EZ that is variablely displayed is the remaining one among a plurality of staging symbols EZ, and it depends on which symbol the staging symbol EZ that is variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of staging symbols EZ indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is slightly shaken in the display screen 50a, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage to the gate 13 include ordinary symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) shown in FIG. 16B. The ordinary symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 12D. Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot (whether or not the jackpot game is executed) by using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (F), the jackpot determination table is provided corresponding to each of the set values. In this embodiment, six types of set values, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", or "6", are provided.

The set value is a parameter that determines the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination process (appropriately referred to as "big hit determination probability" or "big hit winning probability"). The set value is set by an employee of the amusement park or the like, as will be described later. Each of the jackpot determination tables corresponding to the respective set values shown in FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (F) is commonly used in the normal probability state and the time saving state. The types of set values and the types of the jackpot determination table are not limited to the six types, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (F), each of the jackpot determination tables corresponding to each set value has a jackpot random value determined to be either jackpot, small hit, or loss. Are sorted. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 uses a jackpot determination table corresponding to a set value to determine whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. In this embodiment, it is set to win a small hit, but it may be set so that the small hit is not won. Further, the probability of being determined as a jackpot and the method of distributing the jackpot random number value determined to be a jackpot are not limited to FIGS. 17A to 17F, and can be appropriately changed.

The setting whose setting value is "1" is called "setting 1", the setting whose setting value is "2" is called "setting 2", and the setting whose setting value is "3" is "setting 3". A setting with a setting value of "4" is called "setting 4", a setting with a setting value of "5" is called "setting 5", and a setting with a setting value of "6" is called "setting 6". Also called. Further, a setting whose setting value is "1" is called a setting value "1" (first setting value), a setting whose setting value is "2" is called a setting value "2", and a setting value is "3". The setting that is is called the setting value "3", the setting that the setting value is "4" is called the setting value "4", and the setting that the setting value is "5" is called the setting value "5". The setting in which is "6" is also referred to as a set value "6" (second set value).

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 2 when the set value "1" is set is about 1/301 (FIG. 17). See (A)). Further, when the set value "2" is set, the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is about 1/280 (see FIG. 17B). ). When the set value "3" is set, the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is about 1/260 (see FIG. 17 (C)). .. When the set value "4" is set, the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is about 1/240 (see FIG. 17 (D)). .. When the set value "5" is set, the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is about 1/221 (see FIG. 17 (E)). .. Finally, when the set value "6" is set, the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 1 or the jackpot winning probability in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is about 1/200 (FIG. 17 (F). )reference).

Further, in this embodiment, any of the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6" is set. Even if this is the case, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the special figure 1 big hit determination process (hereinafter referred to as the small hit winning probability) is about 1/19 (see FIG. 17). That is, the small win winning probability in the lottery of the first special symbol of this embodiment is the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or The same applies regardless of which of the set values "6" is set. On the other hand, when any of the setting value "1", the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", the setting value "5", or the setting value "6" is set. However, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the special figure 2 big hit determination process is 1/2 (see FIG. 17). That is, the small win winning probability in the lottery of the second special symbol of this embodiment is the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or The same applies regardless of which of the set values "6" is set. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the small hit winning probability (1 /) in the lottery of the second special symbol is higher than the small hit winning probability (about 1/19) in the lottery of the first special symbol of the present embodiment. 2) has a higher configuration (see FIG. 17).

6. Description of the gaming state Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special figure display 81 and the normal figure display 82 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 have a variable time shortening function.

The state in which the fluctuation time shortening function of the special figure display 81 is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special figure display 81 is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time-reduced state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-reduced state. That is, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table defined so that the variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 19). That is, when the variable time shortening function of the special symbol display 81 is activated, it becomes easier to select a short variable time as the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol as compared with the case where the special symbol display 81 is not activated. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

The fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82 operates in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special figure display 81. That is, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82 operates in the time saving state and does not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 18C). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 20). That is, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D is operating.

Under the situation where the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 42 and the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D are operating, the electric chew 12D is opened more frequently than when these functions are not operating. Then, the game ball frequently wins a prize at the second starting port 12. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 12 by the electric chew 12D) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called the electric support control state. The low base state is also called the non-electric support control state. The high base state corresponds to the "privilege game state".

In the high base state (the situation where the time saving state is operating), the function for increasing the number of times of opening of the electric chew 12D is not operating (see FIG. 20), but the function for increasing the number of times of opening of the electric chew 12D is activated. You may. That is, in the auxiliary game executed in the high base state, the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened may be larger than that in the auxiliary game executed in the non-time saving state. Further, the probability fluctuation function of the normal figure display 82 may be activated in the high base state. That is, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery in the low base state may be set relatively low, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery in the high base state may be set relatively high. In this case, it is advisable to set the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the low base state to "zero". This is because it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in the low base state. That is, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an aggressive game aimed at executing a small hit game based on the lottery of the second special symbol despite the low base state.

Furthermore, the high base state does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, the operation of one or more of the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal figure display 82, the opening time extension function of the electric chew 12D, the opening frequency increasing function of the electric chew 12D, and the probability fluctuation function of the normal figure display 42. It suffices if the electric chew 12D is easier to open than when the function is not operating. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, "4R time saving big hit", "9R time saving big hit", "time saving small hit 1", "time saving small hit 2", or "time saving small hit 3" The game state after the jackpot game that is won and executed is a time-saving state and a high-base state. The time saving state and the high base state are terminated when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (99 times in this embodiment), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, the game state after the big hit game executed by winning the "4R normal big hit" or the "normal small hit" is a non-time saving state and a low base state (see FIG. 15). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "normal gaming state". When playing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal gaming state.

In the high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 6R (see FIG. 4) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 12D than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 12 than to win the first starting port 11. .. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 13 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is hit right to win the second starting port 12. In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 6L (see FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 12D compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 11 than to win the second starting port 12. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 11.

7. The game control board unit and the method of changing and confirming the set value Next, the game control board unit 100B, the method of changing the setting, and the method of confirming the setting will be described in order. First, the game control board unit 100B will be described. 21 (A) is a perspective view of the game control board unit 100B, FIG. 21 (B) is a front view of the game control board unit 100B, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game control board unit 100B. be. As described above, the game control board unit 100B includes a game control board 100 and a game control board case 100A.

As shown in FIG. 22, the game control board case 100A includes a lid case 410 that covers the component mounting surface (rear surface) side of the game control board 100, and a bottom case 420 that covers the solder surface (front surface) side of the game control board 100. , Is equipped. The game control board 100 is screwed to the lid case 410, and the lid case 410 is assembled to the bottom case 420. In this way, the game control board 100 is housed inside the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 21 (A)). After accommodating the game control board 100, the game control board case 100A is hermetically sealed with caulking pins 430 and 430 on the left side and the right side (see FIG. 21B).

A game control microcomputer 101 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction and the center in the up-down direction of the game control board 100 via an IC socket. Further, a 7-segment display 300 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction and the lower part in the up-down direction (below the game control microcomputer 101) of the game control board 100. The game control board case 100A is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the mounted parts such as the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 from the outside of the game control board case 100A.

Further, a setting key cylinder 180 is mounted on the lower left portion of the game control board 100 (the lower right portion when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is viewed from the rear). As shown in FIG. 22, the mounting position of the setting key cylinder 180 is a position separated from the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 by a predetermined distance. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted at a distance of about 2 cm from the lower edge 100a and the left edge 100b of the game control board 100, respectively. In this way, it is necessary to provide a gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the peripheral edge of the game control board 100 (the setting key cylinder 180 is mounted in a region other than the peripheral edge of the game control board 100). This is so that the connector parts can be mounted according to the requirements. That is, if the space on which the connector parts can be mounted is left on the game control board 100 in this way, when a game machine (different model) of a different type from the pachinko game machine PY1 of the present embodiment is manufactured in the future. , The connector component can be easily added to the game control board without significantly changing the wiring pattern of the game control board 100. That is, it is possible to standardize the wiring pattern (wiring pattern other than the connector component) of the game control board between different models.

The setting key cylinder 180 is a switch component capable of switching between an ON state and an OFF state by using a dedicated setting key 184 (see FIG. 21A). As shown in FIG. 22, the setting key cylinder 180 includes a rotating portion 183 (inner cylinder, inner cylinder portion) rotatably provided inside the fixing portion 182 (outer cylinder, outer cylinder portion). .. The rotating portion 183 is provided with a keyhole 185 for inserting the setting key 184.

The setting key 184 is inserted into the keyhole 185 of the setting key cylinder 180, and the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is turned from the OFF position (also called the standby position or the initial position, which is shown by the solid line in FIG. 30) to the ON position (rotation). The switching circuit (setting key cylinder switch 180a, which will be described later, see FIG. 28) in the setting key cylinder 180 is switched ON / OFF by rotating to the position (the position shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 30), which is also called the position or the moving position. be able to. The state in which the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF is referred to as an OFF state of the setting key cylinder 180, and the state in which the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON is referred to as an ON state of the setting key cylinder 180. Further, the ON position of the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is a position rotated by 90 degrees from the OFF position. Further, the fact that the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is in the ON position (rotating position) is also referred to as "the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotating position", and the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is in the OFF position (standby). The fact that it is in the position) is also referred to as "the setting key cylinder 180 is in the standby position".

As shown in FIG. 22, the setting key cylinder 180 has a key insertion side portion 187 having a keyhole surface 186 provided with a keyhole 185, and a lead portion 199 (see FIG. 23) connected to the game control board 100. It is provided with a board connection side portion 188. The key insertion side portion 187 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the lid case 410 side, and is a portion that looks like a substantially cylindrical shape in FIG. 21. Further, the board connection side portion 188 is a portion of the setting key cylinder 180 on the game control board 100 side, and is a portion that looks like a substantially quadrangular prism in FIG. 22. That is, the key insertion side portion 187 is the rear side when the setting key cylinder 180 is divided into two parts in the axial direction, and the board connection side portion 188 divides the setting key cylinder 180 into two parts in the axial direction. This is the front side of the cylinder.

Here, the configuration of the setting key cylinder 180 will be described in more detail. 23 (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 21 (B), and FIG. 23 (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 21 (B). As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, the setting key cylinder 180 has a metal fixing member 198 fitted on the outside of the cylinder portion 197 (the portion including the fixing portion 182 and the rotating portion 183). Is. The cylinder portion 197 has a flange portion 197a (in other words, a surface orthogonal to the axial direction of the cylinder portion 197), which is thicker than the diameter of the keyhole surface 186, at an intermediate portion (substantially center) in the axial direction (front-back direction). A flange portion 197a larger than the keyhole surface 186, which corresponds to a "specific portion") is provided. The fixing member 198 is provided with a substantially circular opening (see FIG. 22), through which the keyhole surface 186 side of the cylinder portion 197 is inserted. Further, the fixing member 198 is hooked on the flange portion 197a. The connection piece 198a and the connection pin 198b formed on the fixing member 198 are soldered to the game control board 100, and the lead portion 199 extending from the cylinder portion 197 is soldered to the game control board 100. In this way, the setting key cylinder 180 is attached to the game control board 100. The key insertion side portion 187 described above is a portion (a portion on the lid case 410 side) behind the fixing member 198 in the setting key cylinder 180 (see FIG. 22), and the board connection side portion 188 is the setting key cylinder. It is a part other than the key insertion side part 187 in 180.

Next, the relationship between the setting key cylinder 180 and the game control board case 100A will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the lid case 410 of the game control board case 100A is provided with an opening 411 for exposing the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 to the outside. When viewed from the rear, the opening 411 has a circular shape having a diameter slightly larger than that of the circular keyhole surface 186 (see FIG. 21B). In a state where the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially flush with each other (FIG. 23 (A)). (B)). The gap L1 between the key insertion side portion 187 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 of the lid case 410 is about 1 mm or less.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 (A) and 23 (B), the inner surface 410b (see FIG. 23) of the lid case 410 is on the front side (toward the bottom case 420) from the peripheral edge of the opening 411. A peripheral wall portion 413 extending toward the wall is provided. The peripheral wall portion 413 includes an upper wall portion 413a surrounding the upper part of the opening 411, a lower wall portion 413b surrounding the lower part of the opening 411, a left wall portion 413c surrounding the left side of the opening 411, and the right side of the opening 411. It is a rectangular peripheral wall composed of a right wall portion 413d surrounding the side. The length dimension L2 (see FIG. 23 (A)) of the peripheral wall portion 413 in the front-rear direction is about 8 mm, and the thickness L3 of the peripheral wall portion 413 (see FIG. 23 (A)) is about 2 mm. In a state where the game control board case 100A accommodates the game control board 100, the peripheral wall portion 413 surrounds the upper, lower, left and right sides of the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180 up to the flange portion 197a of the setting key cylinder 180 ( See FIG. 23 (A)). The gap L4 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the substrate connection side portion 188 is about 1 mm or less. Further, the gap L5 between the peripheral wall portion 413 and the component mounting surface of the game control board 100 is about 5 mm.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game control board case 100A is provided with a peripheral wall portion 413 that surrounds the setting key cylinder 180 according to the shape of the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from being displaced due to an external force such as its own weight. As a result, it is possible to maintain good connection of the setting key cylinder 180. If only the prevention of displacement due to the weight of the setting key cylinder 180 is considered, only the lower wall portion 413b of the peripheral wall portions 413 may be provided.

Further, in this embodiment, the keyhole surface 186 of the setting key cylinder 180 and the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 are substantially on the same plane (see FIG. 23). That is, the keyhole surface 186 does not protrude or retract with respect to the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, as compared with the case where the setting key cylinder 180 protrudes from the game control board case 100A, it is possible to secure a space behind the game control board case 100A and prevent the setting key cylinder 180 from being damaged. Further, since the gap between the setting key cylinder 180 and the opening 411 can be almost eliminated as compared with the one retracted with respect to the game control board case 100A (the opening 411 is closed by the setting key cylinder 180). Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the game control board case 100A from the opening 411. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent use of the setting key cylinder 180 and malfunction of the game control board 100.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening 411 of the game control board 100 is closed by the setting key cylinder 180, and the peripheral wall portion 413 provided on the game control board 100 is around the board connection side portion 188 of the setting key cylinder 180. (See FIGS. 21 (A) and 23 (A) (B)). Therefore, it is more difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as intruding a foreign substance (for example, a wire, a piano wire, etc.) from the opening 411 to access the game control microcomputer 101 or the like. Further, since the setting key cylinder 180 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 413, a foreign substance (for example, a wire, a piano wire, etc.) may be allowed to enter the inside of the game control board case 100A from a place other than the opening 411. However, it is possible to suppress contact with the setting key cylinder 180. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a, which will be described later, to be switched due to the influence of illegal magnetism.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 24, various stickers are attached to the game control board case 100A. In this embodiment, there are four stickers attached to the game control board case 100A: a model name sticker 510, an external terminal information sticker 520, a board management sticker 530, and a seal sticker 540. Each of these stickers is a model information sticker showing information about the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

The model name sticker 510 is a model information sticker on which the model name, manufacturer name, and the like of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are described.

Further, the external terminal information sticker 520 is a model information sticker in which an explanation regarding the external terminal of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is described. The external terminal (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a terminal for outputting information from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to an external device such as a hall computer. There are multiple types of external terminals. Specifically, for example, a prize ball signal indicating information on the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a frame opening signal indicating that the game machine frame 2 is open, and special figures 1 and 2 are stopped and displayed. There are a symbol confirmation signal indicating that the game has been played, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, or a time saving state is in progress. The connector portion of each external terminal is colored differently from each other. The correspondence between the color and the signal is described on the external terminal information sticker 520.

The board management sticker 530 describes the control number of the game control board 100 (game control board unit 100B), and when the game control board case 100A is opened for inspection or the like (caulking pins 430 and 430 are removed). This is a model information sticker provided with an entry field for the person who opened the game control board case 100A (when the seal is released) and the date of opening.

The seal sticker 540 is a model information sticker on which the characters "opening prohibited" indicating that the game control board case 100A must not be opened are described. The seal 540 is affixed across both the lid case 410 and the bottom case 420 with the lid case 410 locked to the bottom case 420 (that is, with the game control board case 100A closed). There is. Therefore, when the game control board case 100A is opened, the seal seal 540 is broken. Therefore, by looking at the seal sticker 540, it is possible to know whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. In other words, the seal sticker 540 is a model information sticker that clearly indicates whether or not the game control board case 100A has been opened. A model information sticker (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530) other than the seal sticker 540 is attached to the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 as shown in FIG. 24, and the bottom case 420. It is not affixed across. The seal may be provided with an IC chip with an antenna, and the ID information stored in the IC chip may be readable by a dedicated reader.

Further, the information described on each model information sticker (model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530, seal sticker 540) can be appropriately increased or decreased as long as the function of each model information sticker is not impaired. .. For example, information such as rated voltage and rated power may be described on the model name sticker 510. Further, as the model information sticker, it is not necessary to include all of the model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, the board management sticker 530, and the seal sticker 540. The model name sticker 510, the external terminal information sticker 520, and the board management sticker 530 in this embodiment are printed with various model information and entry fields in a predetermined color such as white on a colorless and transparent base portion. .. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to visually recognize the inside of the game control board case 100A to some extent through the sticker.

Here, as shown in FIG. 24, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are located on the left side of the game control board case 100A (the right side when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). It is affixed. On the other hand, the board management sticker 530 and the seal seal 540 are attached to the right side of the game control board case 100A (the left part when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). More specifically, the model name sticker 510 is the lower left portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower right portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front), and exposes the setting key cylinder 180. It is attached to the right side of the opening 411 (the left side when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front). Further, the external terminal information sticker 520 is the upper left portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper right portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front), and is the model name seal 510 and the opening portion 411. It is affixed above. Further, the substrate management seal 530 is attached to the upper right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the upper left portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control substrate case 100A is viewed from the front). Further, the sealing sticker 540 is the lower right portion of the rear surface 410a of the lid case 410 (the lower left portion when the rear surface 410a in the game control substrate case 100A is viewed from the front) and is attached below the substrate management seal 530.

As described above, in this embodiment, the model name sticker 510 and the external terminal information sticker 520 are the left side area of the lid case 410 (the right side area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front, the first sticker sticking area). 415), the board management seal 530 and the seal seal 540 are attached to the right side area of the lid case 410 (the left side area when the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A is viewed from the front, the second seal attachment area 416). It is affixed. The area between the first sticker sticking area 415 and the second sticker sticking area 416 in the lid case 410 is a non-sticking area 417 to which no model information sticker is stuck. The non-sticking area 417 is located at a position corresponding to the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 mounted on the game control board case 100A. In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are mounted on the game control board 100 at a position visible from the non-sticking area 417. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 are clearly visible from the non-sticking area 417 without being impaired by various model information stickers. As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-sticking area 417 functions as a "window portion" that makes both the game control microcomputer 101 and the 7-segment display 300 visible. Hereinafter, the non-sticking area 417 is also referred to as a common window portion 417.

Here, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, the model (chip name) and serial number of the game control microcomputer 101 (that is, information that can identify the game control microcomputer 101), such information, and the like are encoded. The two-dimensional code is printed. Further, on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101, a model information sticker 550 for a microcomputer on which a two-dimensional code in which the model name and manufacturer name of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and such information are coded is printed is affixed. .. From the common window unit 417, various information shown on the surface of the game control microcomputer 101 can be read visually or by using a code reader.

Further, not only the game control microcomputer 101 but also the 7-segment display 300 can be visually recognized from the common window unit 417. As will be described later, the set value and the base may be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to clearly see the set value and the base from the common window portion 417. When viewed facing the rear surface 410a of the game control board case 100A, there is a distance of at least 510 minutes between the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180. Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, it is difficult for the 7-segment display 300 to be hidden by the hand (or arm) that operates the setting key cylinder 180, and the display contents of the 7-segment display 300 can be visually recognized. It is difficult for situations that are difficult to do to occur. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is located outside the information display area 418 including the first sticker sticking area 415, the second sticker sticking area 416, and the common window portion 417 (specifically, on the rear surface 410a in the game control board case 100A). When viewed face-to-face, it is located on the right side of the information display area 418). Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 180 is operated with the right hand, the information display area 418 is difficult to be hidden by the hand (or arm) that operates the setting key cylinder 180, and the visibility of the information display area 418 (that is, the game control microcomputer 101). , 7-segment display 300, model name sticker 510, external terminal information sticker 520, board management sticker 530, and seal sticker 540) are good.

Next, the 7-segment display 300 (display means) will be described. The display control of the 7-segment display 300 is executed by the game control microcomputer 101. The reason why the 7-segment display 300 is provided not on the staging control board 120 but on the game control board 100 is based on the following reasons. That is, the game control board 100 (game control microcomputer 101) is an inspection target of a test for confirming proper operation, and if the display of the set value is controlled by the game control board 100, the display of the set value is displayed. This is because reliability can be guaranteed.

As shown in FIG. 25, the 7-segment display 300 is a so-called 4-series 7-segment display (7-segment display), and includes a total of 32 lighting (light emitting) portions (segments). Specifically, the 7-segment display 300 includes a first display area 310, a second display area 320, a third display area 330, and a fourth display area 340 in order from left to right. The four display areas 310, 320, 330, and 340 each have eight lighting portions (LED elements, segments) LB1 so as to be able to represent numbers, letters, symbols, and the like from "0" to "9", respectively. It has LB8, LB9 to LB16, LB17 to LB24, and LB25 to LB32. Since the 4-series 7-segment display is a distribution product that is widely distributed in the market, it is possible to inexpensively configure the display means by using the 4-series 7-segment display (7-segment display 300).

In this embodiment, any of the set values from "1" to "6" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. When the set value is displayed, the lighting portions LB25 to LB32 of the fourth display area 340 emit light in a lighting mode (light emission mode in which light is continuously emitted) so as to represent the numerical value of the set value. When the set value is displayed in the fourth display area 340, nothing is displayed in the first display area 310, the second display area 320, and the third display area 330.

Next, a method of changing the set value will be described. In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode. The transition to the setting change mode can be performed only when the power is turned on. Here, not only the operation for shifting to the setting change mode, but also various operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on will be collectively described. As shown in FIG. 26, there are four types of operations that can be performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on: a setting change mode transition operation, a setting confirmation operation, a RAM clear operation, and a normal power on operation.

The setting change mode transition operation (setting change enablement operation) is an operation for shifting to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. Specifically, it is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on both the setting key cylinder 180 (setting key switch) and the RAM clear switch 191. By this operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is in the power-on state), and the mode after the power is turned on becomes the setting change mode. The operation for changing the setting and the operation for confirming the setting in the setting change mode will be described later. The setting change mode ends when the setting is confirmed. As a result, the game mode (one of the non-setting change modes) in which the game can be played is set.

The setting confirmation operation is an operation for shifting to the setting confirmation mode (one of the non-setting change modes). The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the set value cannot be changed, but the set value can be confirmed by displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300. Specifically, the setting confirmation operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on the setting key cylinder 180. In the setting confirmation operation, the RAM clear switch 191 is left in the OFF state. By such a setting confirmation operation, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the mode after the power is turned on becomes the setting confirmation mode. The setting confirmation mode ends when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. After the setting confirmation mode ends, the game mode becomes playable. The setting confirmation mode may be configured to end when the setting key cylinder 180 is turned off (the setting key is rotated to the OFF position).

The RAM clear operation is an operation for shifting to the RAM clear mode (one of the non-setting change modes). The RAM clear mode is a mode in which "RAM clear" is performed to initialize a predetermined storage area or the like of the game RAM 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 101. When the RAM is cleared, the game content so far is cleared. Even if the RAM is cleared, the information of the set value stored in the gaming RAM 104 is not erased and is retained. Further, even if the mode is changed to the RAM clear mode, the set value cannot be changed and the set value is not displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Specifically, the RAM clear operation is an operation of turning on the power switch 195 (turning on the power switch 195) while turning on the RAM clear switch 191. In the RAM clear operation, the setting key cylinder 180 is left in the OFF state. By such a RAM clear operation, electric power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the RAM is cleared. The RAM clear mode is automatically terminated when a predetermined process related to RAM clear is executed. When the RAM clear mode ends, the game mode becomes playable. In this embodiment, the RAM is cleared even when the setting change mode is terminated. However, by providing an operation that only clears the RAM without changing the setting in this way, it is possible to clear only the RAM with a smaller amount of work than the work amount of changing the setting. ..

The normal power-on operation is an operation for turning on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 without shifting to the setting change mode, shifting to the setting confirmation mode, and clearing the RAM. Specifically, the normal power-on operation is an operation in which both the setting key cylinder 180 and the RAM clear switch 191 are left in the OFF state, and the power switch 195 is turned on (the power switch 195 is turned ON). .. By this operation, electric power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to enter a game mode in which the pachinko gaming machine can be played.

The above-mentioned four operations (setting change mode transition operation, setting confirmation operation, RAM clear operation, and normal power-on operation) are generally performed by the employees of the amusement park, and are performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It is impossible for a player who cannot see the back side (see FIG. 9).

In this embodiment, as described above, in order to change the set value, it is necessary to satisfy the three conditions (based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition) and shift to the setting change mode. Specifically, the setting key cylinder 180 is set to the rotation position (ON state) rotated 90 degrees from the standby position (OFF state) by using the setting key 184, and the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed (ON state). ) To switch the power switch 195 from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). The reason why these three conditions are set is based on the following reasons.

First, the condition that the power is turned on is to enable the employee of the amusement park to shift to the setting change mode only when the power is turned on. That is, this is to prevent a situation in which the player or the like can shift to the setting change mode during the variable display of the special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game, and the set value is changed during the game. Next, the condition of pressing the RAM clear switch 191 is to prevent the game from being started based on the information related to the game before the power is turned on, even though the set value has been changed. Because. That is, if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is always erased (RAM clear) as described later. Therefore, for example, the remaining special figure hold is judged to be a big hit with the set value before the power is turned off, but the remaining special figure hold is judged to be a loss with the set value changed after the power is turned on. It is possible to prevent situations where game inconsistencies occur. Finally, the condition that the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotation position is to confirm the intention of the employee of the amusement place to change the set value. That is, the setting change mode is a special mode in which the setting value can be changed to the last, and is to prevent the transition to the setting change mode at random or easily.

Next, when the set value is changed, the display mode on the 7-segment display 300 and the effect mode on the effect means (image display device 50, speaker 620, frame lamp 212, and board lamp 54) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 27 (A), when the setting change mode transition operation is performed to shift to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 is displayed. The set value (for example, "1") that was set before the power was turned on is displayed. That is, the information of the set value set during the previous game is not deleted even in the blocked state. Therefore, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed when the power is turned on, the setting value set during the previous game is 7-segment based on the stored setting value information (hereinafter referred to as "setting value information"). It is displayed on the display 300. As a result, it is possible to first confirm the current set value (previously determined set value) when the power is turned on.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 27B, the setting changing image SH (mode suggestion image) indicating the characters "setting changing" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. Will be done. The image SH during setting change suggests that the setting value can be changed. By starting the display of the image SH during setting change, it is possible to let the employee of the amusement park (hereinafter referred to as "setting changer") who changes the setting value know that the setting change mode has been correctly performed. Is. Further, the setting changing image SH continues to be displayed on the display screen 50a until the setting change mode ends. Therefore, the setting changer can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode by the display period of the image SH during the setting change.

Further, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 27B, the speaker 620 outputs a voice (mode suggestion sound) stating that the setting can be changed. This "setting changeable" voice suggests that the setting value can be changed. By starting the voice "Settings can be changed", it is possible to make the person who changed the settings audibly understand that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode correctly. In addition, the voice "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing when the setting value is changed. Therefore, the person who changes the setting can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he / she continues to hear the voice "The setting can be changed".

Further, when the setting change mode is entered, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special first light emitting mode. The light emission in this special first light emission mode suggests that the set value can be changed. By starting the light emission in the first light emission mode, it is possible to make the setting changer know that the setting change mode has been correctly performed. Further, the light emission of the first light emitting mode by the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 continues until the setting change mode ends, except for the timing when the set value is changed. Therefore, the person who changes the setting can clearly grasp the period from the start to the end of the setting change mode as long as he / she keeps watching the light emission of the first light emission mode.

In this way, in this embodiment, not only the image SH during the setting change is displayed in the setting change mode, but also the voice "setting can be changed" is output and the light is emitted in the special first light emission mode. To. As a result, the setting changer can surely grasp the situation where the setting value can be changed both visually and audibly. And, the setting change mode of this embodiment is a complicated operation because it is necessary to satisfy the three conditions as described above. It is possible to determine whether or not the setting change mode transition operation has been correctly executed depending on whether or not the mode suggestion of light emission in the special first light emission mode is started.

Here, in the present embodiment, the set value can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 191 in the setting change mode. Specifically, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is incremented by one in the order of "1" ⇒ "2" ⇒ "3" ⇒ "4" ⇒ "5" ⇒ "6". It is possible to make it. When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value is "6", the set value returns to "1". Therefore, each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, the set value is switched one by one, so that the method of switching the set value is made as simple as possible.

The existing RAM clear switch 191 is used as the operation means for switching the set value, and the dedicated operation means is not newly provided. Conventionally, the RAM clear switch 191 is used only for erasing the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 when the power is turned on, and is not used except when the power is turned on. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 is used as both an operation means for switching the set value and an operation means for erasing the stored information of the game RAM 104 and the like, thereby reducing the number of parts. It is possible to plan.

However, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the setting change mode is set, the game information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 are stored at the timing of the pressing operation. The information related to the payout is not deleted. This is because the control process becomes complicated if the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 erase the stored information each time the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed. .. In this way, the information stored in the game RAM 104 and the payout RAM 174 is not erased while the setting change mode is set, and the control processing of the game control microcomputer 101 and the payout control microcomputer 171 is complicated. It is preventing it from becoming.

As shown in FIG. 27 (B), when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed after the set value "1" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300, for example, when the setting change mode is entered, FIG. 26 (C) is shown. As shown in the above, the set value "2" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. That is, the display of the set value "1" is switched to the display of the set value "2". This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the set value has been switched to "2".

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), a set value change image YG (change suggestion image) indicating an upward arrow is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 so as to be superimposed on the setting changing image SH. Will be done. By displaying the set value change image YG, it is possible to make the person who changed the setting know that the set value has been changed (increased). The set value change image YG is displayed only for a few seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and then disappears, and only the setting changing image SH is displayed again on the display screen 50a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the voice "The set value has been changed" is output from the speaker 620. It is possible to let the person who changed the setting know that the setting value has been changed by the voice "The setting value has been changed". The voice "The setting value has been changed" is output only once, and then the voice "The setting can be changed" is repeatedly output as described above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emitting mode. By emitting light in this second light emitting mode, it is possible to make the person who changes the setting know that the set value has been changed. The light emission in the second light emission mode is executed only for a few seconds after the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, and then returns to the light emission in the first light emission mode as described above.

Subsequently, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed while the set value "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as shown in FIG. 27 (C), 7 is performed as shown in FIG. 22 (D). The set value "3" is displayed in the fourth display area 340 of the segment display 300. That is, the display of the set value "2" is switched to the display of the set value "3". This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the set value has been switched to "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (D), the set value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the speaker 620 outputs the voice "the set value has been changed", and the frame lamp. The 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special second light emitting mode. From these, it is possible to make the person who changed the setting know that the set value has been changed again.

By the way, the person who changes the setting is basically facing the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (see FIG. 9), and when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed and operated, he / she is looking at the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is difficult for the setting changer to grasp the display of the setting value change image YG on the display screen 50a and the light emission in the special second light emission mode on the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54. Therefore, the display of the set value change image YG and the light emission in the special second light emission mode indicate that the set value has been changed mainly for the employees of the game hall around the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It means to suggest (notify). In this way, the employees of the surrounding amusement parks can grasp the change of the set value, so that it is possible to grasp that the set value has not been changed illegally.

In particular, when the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, as shown in FIGS. 27 (C) and 27 (D), the set value change image YG is displayed on the display screen 50a rather than the setting changing image SH display (mode suggestion). Display (change suggestion) is given priority. Further, in the speaker 620, the output of the voice "the setting value has been changed" (suggestion of change) is prioritized over the output of the voice "the setting can be changed" (mode suggestion). Further, in the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54, light emission in the special second light emission mode (change suggestion) is prioritized over light emission in the special first light emission mode (mode suggestion). In this way, by giving priority to the suggestion that the set value has been changed over the suggestion that the set value can be changed, in the unlikely event that the set value is changed illegally, employees of the surrounding amusement park It is possible to make it easier for members to notice cheating.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 27 (C) and 27 (D), the set value change image YG does not show the set value itself to be changed, but merely shows that the set value has been changed. Also, the voice "The setting value has been changed" does not indicate the setting value itself to be changed, but merely indicates that the setting value has been changed. In this way, in the setting change mode, the setting value is not shown by the staging means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620, except for the 7-segment display 300, which is mainly seen only by the setting changer. Therefore, even if the employees of the surrounding amusement park can grasp the situation where the set value can be changed and the change of the set value, it cannot grasp the value of the set value itself. Therefore, even if an outsider such as a player looks at the display screen 50a or hears the sound from the speaker 620 in the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped.

Next, a method of confirming the set value will be described. In order to confirm the set value, it is necessary to rotate the rotating portion 183 of the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotating position (ON position) to the standby position (OFF position) using the setting key 184 in the setting change mode. be. As a result, the setting change mode ends, and the last set value displayed in the setting change mode is confirmed. The operation of rotating the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) from the rotating position to the standby position is appropriately referred to as a "setting confirmation operation".

When the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 27 (F), the setting value confirmation image SK indicating the characters "the setting value has been confirmed" is displayed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50. .. By displaying the set value confirmation image SK, it is possible to make the person who changes the setting or the employee of the surrounding amusement park know that the set value has been confirmed. The set value confirmation image SK is displayed for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and then disappears.

Further, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 27 (F), the voice "The setting value has been confirmed" is output from the speaker 620. It is possible to let the person who changed the setting or the employee of the surrounding amusement park know that the set value has been confirmed by the voice "The set value has been confirmed". The voice "The set value has been confirmed" is output only once at the timing when the setting confirmation operation is performed.

Further, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 27 (F), the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special third light emitting mode. By emitting light in this third light emitting mode, it is possible to make the person who changes the setting or an employee of the surrounding amusement park know that the set value has been determined. The light emission in the third light emission mode is executed only for a very short time after the setting confirmation operation is performed, and then ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is completed by performing the setting confirmation operation, the set value displayed in the lighting mode (changeable mode) on the 7-segment display 300 (for example, “1” shown in FIG. 27 (D)). 3 ") disappears. That is, the set value is hidden (non-display mode). Then, instead of the 7-segment display 300, the initial display (see FIG. 27 (F)) described later is executed. In this way, it is possible for the person who changes the setting to grasp the determination of the set value by changing the set value displayed in the lighting mode to the non-display mode. Further, since the set value is not displayed after the set value is confirmed, it is possible to make the confirmed set value less noticeable to the surroundings.

When the set value is determined in this way, as shown in FIG. 27 (F), as the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 from the first display area 310 to the fourth display area 340 are used. (See FIG. 25) lights up. By lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate the execution of the initial display to the setting changer who has performed the setting confirmation operation.

The meaning of the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 is as follows. The 7-segment display 300 displays the set value as described above, and also displays the base as described later. However, the set value or base displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is based on the premise that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally, and the 7-segment display 300 itself has a failure or malfunction. Or, it is not entirely possible that it has been tampered with.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the initial display is automatically executed on the 7-segment display 300. This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the 7-segment display 300 is functioning normally. That is, it is possible to confirm that the setting value displayed in the setting change mode is the correct value. Furthermore, it is possible to recognize that the base displayed after the initial display will also be displayed correctly. If the mode does not shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on.

By the way, in this embodiment, the setting change mode is configured to end before the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is rotated to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. Specifically, at the moment when the setting key 184 starts to move from the rotation position to the standby position, the setting change mode ends and the set value is fixed. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the setting key cylinder switch 180a provided inside the setting key cylinder 180 and the configuration of the electric circuit around the game control microcomputer 101 will be described, and the timing for determining the set value will be explained in detail. do.

As shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with an input terminal P14 (see FIGS. 29 (A), (B), and (C)). The input terminal P14 inputs a switch signal of either "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage) or "L" level (voltage lower than the lower limit threshold voltage) from the signal line E1. There is. If the game control microcomputer 101 inputs an "H" level switch signal (first signal) from the signal line E1, it determines that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON, and determines that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON, and the signal line E1 to the "L" level. If the switch signal (second signal) of is input, it is determined that the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF.

The signal line E1 is connected to the terminal s1 of the setting key cylinder switch 180a. A ground line E4 extending from the branch portion Q1 of the signal line E1 toward the ground G is provided. A resistor T2 is connected in series to the ground line E4, and the resistor T2 makes it difficult for current to flow from the signal line E1 to the ground line E4. In this way, while connecting the signal line E1 extending from the input terminal P14 to the setting key cylinder switch 180a, the ground line E4 is connected at the branch portion Q1 between the setting key cylinder switch 180a and the input terminal P14. ing. Then, the resistor T2 is set as a pull-down resistor. Therefore, in the signal line E1, the level of the switch signal is set to the "L" level unless the power of DC5V is supplied via the setting key cylinder switch 180a.

The setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with terminal s2. A power line E2 is connected to the terminal s2, and DC5V power is supplied to the power line E2. In FIG. 27, the reference numeral Vc means that the electric power of DC5V is supplied. A resistor T3 is connected in series to the power line E2. Further, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with the terminal s3. A ground line E3 extending toward the ground G is connected to the terminal s3.

Here, the setting key cylinder switch 180a is provided with a switching piece s4. One end of the switching piece s4 is connected to the terminal s1. On the other hand, the other end of the switching piece s4 can be brought into contact with the terminal s2 or the terminal s3 by the setting changer rotating the setting key 184. Thus, when the setting key 184 is in the standby position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s3 (see the solid line in FIG. 28), and when the setting key 184 is in the rotating position, the switching piece s4 is in contact with the terminal s2. (See FIG. 29 (A)).

Next, the determination timing of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (A), (B), and (C). FIG. 29A is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the rotating position. At this time, the terminal s1 and the terminal s2 are in a conductive state, and the electric power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. As a result, the "H" level switch signal is input from the signal line E1 to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101. In this way, while the "H" level switch signal is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101, the setting change mode is set.

Then, the setting changer rotates the setting key cylinder 180 from the rotation position to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation. FIG. 29B is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a at the moment when the setting key 184 starts to rotate from the rotation position. As shown in FIG. 29B, when the switching piece s4 is separated from the terminal s2, the terminal s1 and the terminal s2 are in a non-conducting state. Therefore, the power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a. At this time, since the signal line E1 connected to the input terminal P14 is connected to the ground line E4 at the branch portion Q1, the switch signal is switched from the “H” level to the “L” level. That is, the "L" level switch signal is input to the input terminal P14 of the game control microcomputer 101. As a result, the setting change mode ends and the setting value is confirmed.

Note that FIG. 29C is a diagram showing a state of the setting key cylinder switch 180a when the setting key 184 (rotating portion 183) is in the standby position. When the setting changer completely rotates the setting key cylinder 180 to the standby position by the setting confirmation operation, the switching piece s4 comes into contact with the terminal s3. At this time, similarly to the above, the power of DC5V supplied to the power line E2 is not supplied to the signal line E1 via the setting key cylinder switch 180a, so that the switch signal remains at the “L” level.

As can be seen from the above description, the determination timing of the set value is the timing shown in FIG. 29 (B), and the setting change mode ends as soon as the setting key 184 starts rotating from the rotation position. Therefore, as soon as the setting confirmation operation is started, the setting changer hides the setting value (for example, the setting value “3” shown in FIG. 26 (D)) displayed on the 7-segment display 300 in the setting change mode. (See FIG. 27 (F)). In other words, it is possible to hide the set value on the 7-segment display 300 before the setting key 184 has finished rotating to the standby position. In this way, by hiding the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 as soon as possible, it is possible to reduce the risk that the fixed set value will be grasped by the surroundings as much as possible.

In addition, when a busy game hall employee (setting changer) performs a setting confirmation operation before the game hall opens, the setting key 184 (rotating part 183) is correctly rotated to the standby position by careless or unfamiliar operation. There is a risk of not letting it. However, even if such a situation occurs, the switch signal input to the game control microcomputer 101 is switched from the "H" level to the "L" level (see FIGS. 29A and 29B), so that the setting is made. It is possible to fix the value and hide it. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the setting change mode even if the operation is careless or unfamiliar by the setting changer, and it is possible to prevent the setting value from being continuously displayed on the 7-segment display 300. .. Further, as the setting change mode ends earlier, the mode suggestion of displaying the image SH during the setting change, outputting the voice "setting can be changed", and emitting light in the special first light emission mode ends. The timing will be early. Therefore, even if the setting key cylinder 180 is not correctly rotated to the standby position due to careless or unfamiliar operation, it is possible to prevent the situation where the setting value can be changed from being continuously suggested.

On the other hand, in order to shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting key 184 (rotating unit 183) is firmly moved from the standby position (see FIG. 29 (C)) to the rotating position (FIG. 29 (A)). Must be rotated. That is, when the setting key 184 is rotated halfway from the standby position due to an unfamiliar operation or vibration of the setting changer, the switch signal does not switch from the "L" level to the "H" level (FIG. 29). (Refer to (B)), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode. In this way, it is possible to change the setting value only when the setting changer reliably rotates the setting key 184 to the rotation position, and it is possible to prevent unintentional transition to the setting change mode as much as possible. be.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 30, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the left of the 7-segment display 300. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer. Further, the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are located below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180, and closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300 (as viewed from the setting changer). It is located on the right side of the setting key cylinder 180). Further, the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side along the left-right direction.

When trying to change the setting (setting value), the person who changes the setting first opens the inner frame 21 so that the back side of the inner frame 21 can be touched, and the outer cover 25 is provided so as to be openable and closable. Open the open / close cover 25a. As a result, the setting key 184 can be inserted into the setting key cylinder 180 mounted on the game control board 100 arranged inside the outer cover 25.

Here, most setting changers try to operate the setting key 184 with their right hand, which is their dominant hand. At this time, if the setting key cylinder 180 is to the left of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer (that is, from the person facing the setting key cylinder 180), the setting changer's right hand (or The right arm) may cover the 7-segment display 300, making it difficult to see the display content (set value) of the 7-segment display 300.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key cylinder 180 is arranged to the right of the 7-segment display 300 when viewed from the setting changer. As a result, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer is prevented from covering the 7-segment display 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 from becoming difficult to see. It should be noted that such a positional relationship is a situation in which the setting value immediately before confirmation (the setting value immediately before being hidden) cannot be seen, and it is not possible to know what setting value has been confirmed, especially during the setting confirmation operation. It is effective in preventing it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 191 used for the setting value switching operation is below the 7-segment display 300 and the setting key cylinder 180, and is seen from the setting changer from the setting key cylinder 180. It is located on the right side. Therefore, when the setting changer performs the setting value switching operation with the right hand, which is the dominant hand, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 at the time of switching the set value. Further, since the RAM clear switch 191 is located closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300, the setting changer uses the dominant hand (right hand) that operates the setting key cylinder 180 to clear the RAM with less operation. It is possible to operate the switch 191.

Further, in the present embodiment, the power switch 195 used for the setting change mode transition operation is also provided at a position closer to the setting key cylinder 180 than the 7-segment display 300, like the RAM clear switch 191. Therefore, it is possible for the setting changer to operate the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 with a small number of operations by using the dominant hand (right hand) that operates the setting key cylinder 180. In particular, since the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 are arranged side by side at a slight interval, it is easy for the setting changer to operate both the power switch 195 and the RAM clear switch 191 at the same time with only one hand. .. Even during the setting change mode transition operation, the right hand (or right arm) of the setting changer does not cover the 7-segment display 300. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 when shifting to the setting change mode.

If the above effects are not expected, the RAM clear switch 191 is placed below the 7-segment display 300 and closer to the 7-segment display 300 than the setting key cylinder 180 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine). It may be provided at a position on the back side of the PY1 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (or at least a position on the left side of the setting key cylinder 180). With such a configuration, the setting changer can operate the RAM clear switch 191 with the left hand while holding the setting key 184 with the right hand (that is, while holding the operation standby of the setting key 184). Even in such an operation situation, since neither the right hand (or the right arm) nor the left hand (or the left arm) covers the 7-segment display 300, the workability of setting change and the visibility of the 7-segment display 300 are good. It is possible to make it.

Subsequently, returning to FIG. 28, the LED driver 350 will be described. The LED driver 350 is integrally incorporated inside the 7-segment display 300, and is not mounted on the game control board 100. In this way, by using the general-purpose 7-segment display 300 incorporating the LED driver 350, a space for mounting the LED driver on the game control board 100 becomes unnecessary. As a result, it is possible to control the display of the 7-segment display 300 while reducing the burden of design changes to the game control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a serial data transmission terminal TX3. Further, the LED driver 350 is provided with a serial data receiving terminal RXD. The serial data transmission terminal TX3 and the serial data reception terminal RXD are connected by a serial data line E5. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 can control the drive of the LED driver 350 by transmitting serial data via the serial data line E5. As a result, it is possible to perform display control of the set value, initial display, and display control of the base described later on the 7-segment display 300. By performing the display control by serial communication in this way, it is possible to simplify the wiring on the game control board 100 as compared with the case where the display control is performed by parallel communication. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the burden of design changes to the game control board 100.

As shown in FIG. 28, a damping resistor T4 is connected in series to the serial data line E5. With this damping resistor T4, it is possible to attenuate the noise in the serial data line E5. Further, the LED driver 350 is provided with an RST terminal. A reset signal line E6 is connected to the RST terminal. The reset signal line E6 is a line in which a reset signal is transmitted from the power supply unit 190 via the payout control board 170, and a capacitor CA5 is connected in parallel to the reset signal line E6. With this capacitor CA5, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reset signal drops to the "L" level even though the reset signal is at the "H" level due to the influence of static electricity or the like.

Next, a case where the information indicating the set value (set value information) is not stored in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. The set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (set value information storage means, see FIG. 7) of the gaming RAM 104 each time the set value is selected (changed) in the setting change mode. However, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is shipped from the production factory (factory shipment), the set value information storage unit 107 does not store the set value information. In other words, no set value is set. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the set value information storage unit 107 is a storage area (storage means) provided in the game RAM 104, but is provided separately from the game RAM 104. It may be a storage means that exists.

In this pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on in a state where no set value is set, it is possible to shift to the error mode. Even if no setting value is set, if the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the setting change mode is entered instead of the error mode. The error mode is a mode in which control related to the game cannot be executed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and is not canceled unless the power switch 195 is turned off to turn off the power.

In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB25, LB28, LB29, LB30, and LB31 (see FIG. 22) are set to "E. It emits light in an error lighting mode so as to represent the character "". By this light emission, it is possible for the employees of the amusement park and the like to know that the error mode has been entered, that is, that the set value has not been set. The light emission (error suggestion) in this error lighting mode continues until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), an operation suggestion image SE indicating the characters "The setting value has not been set. Please perform the setting change mode transition operation" is displayed on the display screen 50a. Is displayed. By displaying the operation suggestion image SE (error notification), it is possible to make the employees of the amusement park understand the situation in which the set value must be set. The display of the operation suggestion image SE continues until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 31B, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620. At this time, as shown in FIG. 30B, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emitting mode. By outputting these error sounds (error notification) and emitting light in the error light emission mode (error notification), it is possible to make the employees of the amusement park understand that the mode has been changed to the error mode. It should be noted that the output of the error sound and the light emission in the error emission mode continue until the error mode is canceled by shutting off the power supply.

Here, in the present embodiment, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 of the gaming RAM 104 is not erased even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on. Therefore, once the setting value information storage unit 107 stores the setting value information by performing the setting change mode transition operation after factory shipment, the setting value information storage unit 107 does not store the setting value information thereafter. Does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the error mode will not be entered when the power is turned on from the next time onward. In short, the error mode is entered when the setting value has never been set and the setting change mode transition operation is not performed when the power is turned on. In this way, even when the RAM clear switch 191 is simply pressed or the power is not turned on (blocked state), the setting value information is not erased, and the error mode is unnecessarily shifted to. It is possible to prevent it. The set value information storage unit 107 is composed of volatile storage means (DRAM) so as to be able to handle a relatively large number of (frequent) accesses, and is, for example, a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM or the like). It may be configured.

8. Display of the base Next, the display of the base will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. In this embodiment, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. The base is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by the player to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls), which is the number of game balls fired by the player. By checking the base on the 7-segment display 300, it is possible to grasp that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has been illegally modified, or that a failure or malfunction has occurred.

The base described in this embodiment means a base in a normal gaming state, a base in a jackpot gaming state, a base in a high probability state and a time saving state, and a base in a normal probability state and a time saving state. It does not mean the base from the time the power is turned on to the present time. That is, the base described below in this embodiment is acquired by the player in the normal game state with respect to the number of shot balls (total number of shot balls) which is the number of game balls fired by the player in the normal game state. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls). Therefore, the total number of fired balls or the number of prize balls described below means the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, the base is newly calculated every time the total number of launched balls reaches 60,000. Then, the base information (base information) calculated each time the number of shots reaches 60,000 is sequentially stored in the base information storage unit 108 (see FIG. 7) of the gaming RAM 104. However, the information of the base currently being calculated (hereinafter referred to as "current base") and the base calculated when the total number of launched balls reaches 60,000 before starting the calculation of the current base (hereinafter "once"). Information on the base (hereinafter referred to as "pre-base"), information on the base calculated when the total number of shots reached 60,000 before the previous base (hereinafter referred to as "two-time pre-base"), and twice. Up to the information of the base (hereinafter referred to as "three times previous base") calculated when the total number of shots reaches 60,000 before the front base is stored in the base information storage unit 108. In this way, in the 7-segment display 300, based on the current-based information stored in the base information storage unit 108, the information on the one-time advance base, the information on the two-time previous base, and the information on the three-time previous base. , The current base, the one-time pre-base, the two-time pre-base, and the three-time pre-base can be displayed.

The timing of starting the display of the base differs depending on whether or not the setting change mode has been entered, that is, whether or not the setting change mode transition operation has been performed. When the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the setting change mode is shifted after the power is turned on as described above. In this case, the base display is started after the setting change mode is finished and the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without performing the setting change mode transition operation, the display of the base is started immediately after the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after the power is turned on. In any case, the point that the display of the base is started after the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 does not change.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), when the initial display is started on the 7-segment display 300, the initial display is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). Then, with the end of the initial display, the present-based display is started, as shown in FIG. 32 (B). Here, when the current base is displayed, the current base (for example, "36") is displayed (% display) in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode (a mode in which light is continuously emitted) as shown by "bL.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "bL.", It means that the base is currently displayed.

The present-based display shown in FIG. 32 (B) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 at the end of the display of the current base, the display of the previous base is started as shown in FIG. 32 (C). Here, when the one-time front base is displayed, the one-time front base (for example, "37") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode as shown by "b1.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "b1.", It means that the previous base is displayed once.

The one-time advance-based display shown in FIG. 32 (C) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 at the end of the display of the previous base, the display of the previous base is started as shown in FIG. 32 (D). To. Here, when the two-time front base is displayed, the two-time front base (for example, "35") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode as shown by "b2.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "b2.", It means that the base is displayed twice before.

The display of the two-time advance base shown in FIG. 32 (D) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). After that, if the information of the three-time previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 with the end of the display of the two-time previous base, the display of the three-time previous base is displayed as shown in FIG. 32 (E). It will be started. Here, when the three-time front base is displayed, the three-time front base (for example, "38") is displayed in two digits in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300. .. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a lighting mode as shown by "b3.". That is, looking at the light emission of the lighting mode of "b3.", It means that the base three times before is displayed.

The display of the three-time advance base shown in FIG. 32 (D) is executed for a predetermined specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment). Then, with the end of the display of the three-time previous base, the display of the current base is started again as shown in FIG. 32 (B). After that, at predetermined specific time intervals, the current base display shown in FIG. 32 (B), the one-time front base display shown in FIG. 32 (C), and the two-time front base shown in FIG. 32 (D). The display and the display based on the previous three times shown in FIG. 32 (E) are repeatedly executed. The current base, the 1st base, the 2nd base, and the 3rd base are displayed with 1% as the standard unit, but for example, 5% may be displayed as the standard unit, and may be changed as appropriate. It is possible.

By the way, FIG. 32C shows a case where the information of the previous base is stored in the base information storage unit 108 and the information of the previous base is displayed. On the other hand, when the information of the previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108, the display shown in FIG. 33 (C) is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 33C, in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 (see FIG. 24) indicate “−−”. It emits light in the lighting mode. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking mode (a mode in which light emission and extinguishing are repeated) as shown by "b1.". In this way, the flashing mode of "b1." And the display of "---" indicate that the previous base cannot be displayed yet.

Similarly, when the information of the previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108 twice, as shown in FIG. 33 (D), the third display area 330 and the fourth display of the 7-segment display 300 are displayed. In the region 340, the lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in the lighting mode as shown by “−−”. Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner as shown by "b2.". In this way, the flashing mode of "b2." And the display of "---" indicate that the base twice before cannot be displayed yet.

Further, when the information of the previous base is not stored in the base information storage unit 108 three times, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, as shown in FIG. 33 (E). , The lighting portions LB23 and LB31 emit light in the lighting mode as shown by "---". Then, in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320, the lighting portions LB1 to LB16 emit light in a blinking manner as shown by "b3.". In this way, the flashing mode of "b3." And the display of "---" indicate that the three-time previous base cannot be displayed yet. The base information storage unit 108 is composed of volatile storage means (DRAM) so as to be able to handle a relatively large number of (frequent) accesses, but is composed of, for example, non-volatile storage means (EEPROM or the like). It may have been done.

9. Transition after turning on the power Next, the transition after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described separately for various operations. When the power is turned on, the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation (OFF state) to the ON operation (ON state). After turning on the power, it is divided into the following five cases.

First, as the first case, there is a case where the setting change mode transition operation is performed. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode as described above. After shifting to the setting change mode, the setting change mode does not end unless the setting key 184 is rotated from the rotation position to the standby position. When the setting change mode ends, as described above, the initial display is executed on the 7-segment display 300, and then the base display is performed (see FIG. 32).

In this embodiment, the setting change mode transition operation includes pressing the RAM clear switch 191 when the power is turned on. However, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is not erased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode ends, the information related to the game is automatically deleted before the process related to the game (game control process from step S101 to step S106 shown in FIG. 43) is executed. ing. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being restarted in a state where the information related to the game stored before the power is turned on remains even though the set value is changed in the setting change mode. Further, when the setting change mode ends, the information related to the game is deleted without pressing the RAM clear switch 191 again. Therefore, the person who changes the setting is forced to delete the information related to the game without forcing the duplication of operations. Is possible.

However, if the information related to the game is deleted after the setting change mode is completed, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because if the information related to the game is deleted and the set value information is also deleted, the set value determined in the setting change mode becomes meaningless. By not erasing the set value information in this way, the set value information remains stored even when the power is turned on next time. As a result, it is not necessary for the employees of the amusement park to set the set value again when the same set value as the previous time is sufficient, and it is possible to avoid an increase in the operation load.

As described above, when the setting change mode is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 erases the information related to the game. After that, the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S101 to step S106) is executed by the main side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 42) described later, and the initial display and the base on the 7-segment display 300. The process related to the display (base display process in step S108) is executed.

Next, as the second case, the setting change mode transition operation may not be performed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting value information is not stored. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the error mode is entered as described above. In the error mode, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), the 7-segment display 300 emits light in an error lighting mode so as to represent the character "E". As a result, it is possible to make the employee of the amusement park who sees the character "E" instead of the set value on the 7-segment display 300 understand that the set value has not been set yet. Further, in the error mode, as shown in FIG. 31B, a special error sound is output from the speaker 620, and the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a special error light emitting mode. This makes it possible to more clearly indicate the transition to the error mode than when the letter "E" is indicated on the 7-segment display 300 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 (see FIG. 8). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the person who has turned on the power switch 195 and the employees of the surrounding amusement park to recognize that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 cannot execute the game. When shifting to the error mode, the error mode cannot be canceled until the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is turned on next time, it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and set the set value (store the set value information).

Subsequently, as a third case, the RAM clear switch 191 may be pressed when the power is turned on while the set value information is stored. However, in the third case, when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation, the setting key cylinder 180 is not rotated to the moving position. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased without shifting to the setting change mode. However, even at this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is not deleted. This is because if the set value information is erased, it is necessary to perform a setting change mode transition operation so as not to shift to the error mode at the next power-on, which complicates the operation. In this way, after the information related to the game is erased, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game-related process (game control process from step S101 to step S106) by the main side timer interrupt process (S005, see FIG. 42) described later. ), And the processing related to the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300 (base display processing in step S108) is executed.

Subsequently, as a fourth case, the setting key 184 may be rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on while the set value information is stored. However, the fourth case is a case where the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power switch 195 is switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation. In this case, as soon as the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting value confirmation mode without shifting to the setting change mode. Unlike the setting change mode, the setting value confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the setting value based on the stored setting value information, although the setting value cannot be selected. For example, when the setting value confirmation mode is entered when the setting value information indicating that the setting value is "1" is stored, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), the fourth display area of the 7-segment display 300 is displayed. 340 emits light so as to indicate "1". This set value confirmation mode ends after a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of displaying the set value on the 7-segment display 300. In this way, if the employee of the game hall simply wants to confirm which set value is set without erasing (ram clearing) the information related to the game when the power is turned on, the setting value confirmation mode can be entered. , It is possible to check the current setting value.

The transition to the set value confirmation mode may be, for example, the following cases. During the game by the player, a malfunction of the image display device 50 and movable members (board movable body 55k, frame movable body provided in the game machine frame 2, first AT opening / closing member 14k, electric chew opening / closing member 12k, etc.) Problems may occur. In this case, the employee of the amusement park may turn on the power again by turning it on after turning off the power switch 195 in order to solve the above-mentioned problem. At this time, since the game is interrupted, the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed when the power is turned on so as not to erase the information related to the game. However, amusement park employees may want to check the set values. Therefore, in such a case, by setting the setting key 184 to the rotation position when the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to the set value confirmation mode and confirm the set value on the 7-segment display 300. be. At this time, the set value is shown only on the 7-segment display 300, and the set value is not suggested by the effect means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620. This is to prevent the player from grasping the set value. It should be noted that an effect suggesting that the set value confirmation mode is set may be executed by an effect means such as the image display device 50 and the speaker 620.

When the set value confirmation mode ends, the game control microcomputer 101 basically does not clear the game-related information, but performs the game-related processing (step) by the main-side timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 42) described later. The game control process from S101 to step S106) is executed, and the process related to the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300 (base display process in step S108) is executed. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (stored) at the time of power failure do not match before the processing related to the game is executed, the exception is the case. Assuming that the stored content of the game RAM 104 is abnormal, the information related to the game is cleared.

Finally, as a fifth case, there is a case where the power switch 195 is simply switched from the OFF operation to the ON operation while the set value information is stored. That is, in the fifth case, the setting key 184 is not rotated to the rotation position when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed. In this case, the mode does not shift to the setting change mode or the setting value confirmation mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, as soon as the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 basically does not clear the information related to the game, executes the process related to the game, and displays the initial display and the base display on the 7-segment display 300. Execute the relevant process. However, if it is determined that the checksum of the game RAM 104 and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored at the time of power failure do not match before the processing related to the game is executed, the checksum of the game RAM 104 is exceptionally related to the game. The information is cleared.

10. Symbol setting suggestion effect and high setting suggestion effect In this embodiment, when the setting change mode is set as described above, the display screen of the image display device 50 is used to reduce the possibility that the set value is grasped by the surroundings as much as possible. An image suggesting a set value is not displayed at 50a. However, even after the setting change mode is finished, if the image suggesting the set value is not displayed at all on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50, the set value is set for the player during the game. It will not be possible to provide the entertainment that makes you guess. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the setting change mode is completed, the symbol setting suggestion effect or the high setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display screen 50a of the image display device 50 to provide the player with interest. Is possible.

First, the symbol setting suggestion effect will be described. The symbol setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value set by either the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, or the right effect symbol EZ3 when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. be. The left effect symbol EZ1 means an effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the left effect symbol display area on the left side of the display screen 50a. Further, the middle effect symbol EZ2 means an effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the middle effect symbol display area in the center of the display screen 50a. Further, the right effect symbol EZ3 means an effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed in the right effect symbol display area on the right side of the display screen 50a.

As shown in FIG. 34, the effect symbol EZ has a display mode in which a portion indicating a number (number portion) and a portion indicating a character are combined, and there are nine types of effect symbol EZ. In the following, the staging symbol EZ whose number part is "1" is called the first staging symbol EZa, the staging symbol EZ whose number part is "2" is called the second staging symbol EZb, and the number part is "3". A certain staging symbol EZ is called a third staging symbol EZc, a staging symbol EZ having a number part of "4" is called a fourth staging symbol EZd, and a staging symbol EZ having a number part of "5" is called a fifth staging symbol EZe. The staging symbol EZ whose number part is "6" is called the sixth staging symbol EZf, the staging symbol EZ whose number part is "7" is called the seventh staging symbol EZg, and the number part is "8". A certain staging symbol EZ will be referred to as an eighth staging symbol EZh, and a staging symbol EZ having a numerical value of "9" will be referred to as a ninth staging symbol EZi.

The symbol setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot determination is a loss. In this case, among the three effect symbols EZ (left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3) that are stopped and displayed using the loss effect symbol lottery table shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (F). One of the staging symbols EZ is determined. The loss effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (F) are provided according to the set values. Therefore, among the losing effect symbol lottery tables shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (F), the table corresponding to the set value currently set is used. As shown in FIGS. 35A to 35F, the ratio of the effect symbol EZ corresponding to the set value among the first effect symbol EZa to the ninth effect symbol EZi is drawn as compared with the other effect symbols EZ ( Various loss effect design lottery tables are set so that the distribution rate) is high. Whether the effect symbol EZ determined in the various lost effect symbol lottery tables is the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, or the right effect symbol EZ3 is determined by lottery. The remaining two staging symbols EZ other than the staging symbol EZ determined in the losing staging symbol lottery table are determined by lottery using the staging symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern.

As described above, for example, when the set value is set to "6" and the staging symbol EZ is stopped and displayed in the loss stop mode, either the left staging symbol EZ1, the middle staging symbol EZ2, or the right staging symbol EZ3. The frequency with which the sixth effect symbol EZf is set increases. That is, when the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 36 (B) after the variable effect is started as shown in FIG. 36 (A). Any one of the three staging symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is likely to be stopped and displayed on the sixth staging symbol EZf. As shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), a city background image Ha indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a non-time saving state is displayed on the display screen 50a. By displaying the city background image Ha on the display screen 50a, it is possible to make the player understand that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a non-time saving state. As a result, the player is made to grasp a relatively large number of stop displays of the sixth effect symbol EZf, and it is possible to infer that the set value is "6". In other words, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which effect symbol EZ has a high frequency of stop display even if it is lost, and it is possible to provide a novel game interest.

Next, the high setting suggestion effect will be described. The high setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the set value is a high setting of "4", "5", or "6" when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed due to SP reach loss. This high setting suggestion effect may be executed only when the set value is set to "4", "5", or "6", and the set value is "1", "2", or "3". If it is set to "", it will not be executed. Therefore, the player can grasp that the set value is "4", "5", or "6" at the stage of grasping the execution of the high setting suggestion effect.

Here, the high setting suggestion effect of this embodiment is a multiple of 10,000 shots such as 10,000 shots, 20,000 shots, 30,000 shots, 40,000 shots, 50,000 shots, and 60,000 shots under the condition that the SP reach is lost. Executed when the conditions reached are met. The condition of SP reach loss is provided in order to maintain the player's motivation to play by executing the high setting suggestion effect for the player who is greatly discouraged by SP reach loss. Further, the condition that the number of shot balls reaches a multiple of 10,000 shots is provided in order to make the high setting suggestion effect a privilege that can be executed very rarely.

Specifically, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 37. That is, after reaching the reach, the battle effect is executed as the SP reach as shown in FIG. 37 (A). In FIG. 37 (A), as a battle effect, a battle image BT showing that the main character and the rival character fight in baseball is displayed on the display screen 50a. After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the battle defeat production is executed as SP reach loss. In FIG. 37 (B), as a battle defeat effect, a battle defeat image BH showing that the main character has been defeated by an enemy character is displayed on the display screen 50a. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), the staging symbol EZ (left staging symbol EZ1, middle staging symbol EZ2, right staging symbol EZ3) is stopped and displayed in a lost mode (for example, "191"). In this way, with the player grasping the SP reach loss, the high setting suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 37 (D). Specifically, in FIG. 37 (D), as a high setting suggestion effect, a phoenix image FT (suggestion effect image) showing that the phoenix flies and appears is displayed on the display screen 50a. As a result, the player who sees the phoenix image FT is made to understand that the set value is "4", "5", or "6", forgets the disappointment of SP reach loss, and is large due to the high setting. It is possible to give an uplifting feeling.

11. Error detection As shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment can detect eight types of frauds and abnormalities with respect to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The first error detection is magnetic detection. Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines to be fraudulent based on the detection of the magnetic detection sensor 201, an error detection command is transmitted to notify the effect control microcomputer 121 of the fraud. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H11H". Of the 2-byte error detection commands, the upper command contains information (E1) that specifies the command type (being an error detection command), and the lower command specifies which fraud was detected. Information (11) to be used is included. The value indicated by the error detection command is not limited to the value shown in FIG. 38, and can be appropriately changed.

Further, as a second error detection, there is an illegal passage detection on the exit side of the first large winning opening 14. Specifically, when the number of game balls that the game control microcomputer 101 has won in the first prize opening 14 and the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area 16 do not match, or the game control microcomputer 101 has won the first prize opening 14. When the number of game balls and the number of game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17 do not match, an error detection command is transmitted in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 121 of the fraud. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H12H".

In addition, there is radio wave detection as a third error detection. Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines to be fraudulent based on the detection of the radio wave detection sensor 202, an error detection command is transmitted to notify the effect control microcomputer 121 of the fraud. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H13H".

Further, there is a door open detection as a fourth error detection. Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the fraud (opening of the game machine frame 2) is determined based on the detection of the door open detection sensor 200, an error detection is performed in order to notify the staging control microcomputer 121 of the fraud. Send a command. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H14H".

Further, there is vibration detection as a fifth error detection. Specifically, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines to be fraudulent based on the detection of the impact detection sensor 203, an error detection command is transmitted to notify the staging control microcomputer 121 of the fraud. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H15H".

In addition, as a sixth error detection, there is an electric chew abnormality winning detection. Specifically, when it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 is not a winning prize for the effective electric chew 12D when the detection by the second start port sensor 12a is made, the abnormality is notified to the staging control microcomputer 121. Send an error detection command to make it happen. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H16H". Here, when the game control microcomputer 101 does not win a prize in the effective electric chew 12D, it is a limited period from the end of the big hit game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery (end of the special game state). This is the case where the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D in (from the later to the start of the next special gaming state) reaches the threshold value shown in FIG. 39.

In addition, as the seventh error detection, there is a large winning opening illegal winning detection. Specifically, when it is determined that the prize is not valid for the first prize opening 14 when the detection by the first prize opening sensor 14a is made, or the detection is made by the second prize opening sensor 15a. When it is determined that the prize is not a valid second prize opening 15, an error detection command is transmitted to notify the effect control microcomputer 121 of the fraud. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H17H".

Further, as the eighth error detection, there is a specific area illegal passage detection. Specifically, when it is determined that the game control microcomputer 101 does not pass through the effective specific area sensor 16a when the detection is made by the specific area sensor 16a, the effect control microcomputer 121 is notified of the fraud. In order to do so, send an error detection command. The error detection command transmitted at this time is "E1H18H".

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, the total number of game balls won in the electric chew is one threshold (for example, 10) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the special symbol lottery. There was something that was judged to be an abnormal winning detection of the electric chew based on the fact that it reached. However, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the time required to win the big hit in the special symbol lottery may differ depending on the setting value to be changed. As a result, there is a difference in the time it takes for the game ball to enter the starting port corresponding to the first special symbol and to win the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (that is, the first hit) in the non-time saving state. It can happen. In such a case, as in the case of the conventional pachinko gaming machine, if the threshold value of the number of winnings of the electric chew 12D in the case of determining that the electric chew abnormal winning detection is set to one, the first special symbol is displayed in a non-time saving state. Depending on the time it takes to win the jackpot in the lottery, the following problems may occur. The problem is that the time it takes to win the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is different in the non-time saving state, but by setting the threshold value of the number of winnings of the electric chew 12D to one, the electric chew can be opened and closed. A game ball enters the electric chew even though the game is being played properly due to a member failure, or a game ball accidentally enters the electric chew, and the game control microcomputer 101 unexpectedly enters the electric chew. It is judged that it is an abnormal winning detection. That is, regardless of the set value, if the threshold value of the number of winnings of the electric chew 12D is set to one, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine whose game control microcomputer can change the set value appropriately detects the electric chew abnormality winning. It may not be possible to make such a judgment.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, a threshold value for the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D may be provided for each set value (see FIG. 39). Further, in the present embodiment, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D differs depending on the non-time saving state or the time saving state. As a result, when the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D shown in FIG. 39 is reached from the end of the big hit game until the big hit is won by the lottery of the special symbol (hereinafter, the electric chew abnormal winning judgment period, see FIG. 40). , It is possible to determine that the electric chew abnormality winning detection is detected by the game control microcomputer 101.

Here, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D will be described with reference to FIG. 39. Here, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is the lottery of the next special symbol after the end of the big hit game necessary for the game control microcomputer 101 to determine that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected. It is the total number of winnings in the electric chew 12D until the big hit is won.

First, with reference to FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state will be described. There are 6 types (multiple) of 10 (second threshold), 12, 14, 16, 18, and 20 (first threshold) winning thresholds for the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state. There is a threshold) (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value "1" is set in the non-time saving state is 20. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value "2" is set in the non-time saving state is 18. As shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value “3” is set in the non-time saving state is 16. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value "4" is set in the non-time saving state is 14. As shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is 12 when the set value “5” is set in the non-time saving state. As shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value “6” is set in the non-time saving state is 10.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability increases in the order of setting value "1" ⇒ setting value "2" ⇒ setting value "3" ⇒ setting value "4" ⇒ setting value "5" ⇒ setting value "6". .. That is, the probability of winning a big hit decreases in the order of setting value "6" ⇒ setting value "5" ⇒ setting value "4" ⇒ setting value "3" ⇒ setting value "2" ⇒ setting value "1". In the state, the number of lottery of the first special symbol may increase until the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. As a result, the first special symbol in the non-time saving state in the order of setting value "1" ⇒ setting value "2" ⇒ setting value "3" ⇒ setting value "4" ⇒ setting value "5" ⇒ setting value "6" There is a possibility that the time it takes to win a big hit (that is, the first hit) in the lottery will be shortened. Therefore, in the non-time saving state of this embodiment, the jackpot game is played in the order of setting value "1" ⇒ setting value "2" ⇒ setting value "3" ⇒ setting value "4" ⇒ setting value "5" ⇒ setting value "6". The threshold value of the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D from the end to the winning of the special symbol lottery is low (see FIG. 39). That is, in the non-time saving state, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "1" (about 1/301) ⇒ the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "2" (about 1/280) ⇒ corresponding to the set value "3" Big hit winning probability (about 1/260) ⇒ Big hit winning probability corresponding to the set value "4" (about 1/240) ⇒ Big hit winning probability corresponding to the set value "5" (about 1/221) ⇒ Set value " In the order of the jackpot winning probability (about 1/200) corresponding to "6", the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the special symbol lottery is lower (see FIG. 39). ). As a result, the jackpot winning probability differs depending on the set value, so even if the period until the jackpot winning is different in the lottery of the first special symbol in the non-time saving state, the appropriate electric chew 12D corresponding to each set value will be obtained. It is possible to set a threshold value for the number of winnings. Therefore, even if the ball enters the electric chew due to a failure of the opening / closing member of the electric chew, or even if the ball accidentally enters the electric chew, whether or not the electric chew abnormality winning detection is appropriately detected by the game control microcomputer 101. It becomes possible to make a judgment. In this way, even if the jackpot winning probability differs for each set value and the period until the jackpot winning differs, by setting a threshold value for the number of winnings to the appropriate electric chew 12D corresponding to each set value, the game control microcomputer 101 This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that an unexpected electric chew abnormality winning detection is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D in the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, among the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6" in the time saving state. , The threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is ∞ regardless of which set value is set. This is because, even though the player has made the electric chew 12D win the game ball in a short time state and is playing the game properly, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is reached and the electric chew abnormal winning detection is detected. This is to prevent the game control microcomputer 101 from determining that the value is the same.

Here, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D in the time saving state or the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state will be described. Temporarily, the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and after the end of the executed jackpot game, or the normal small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the end of the jackpot game executed after that. Later, it will shift to a non-time saving state (see FIG. 15). Whether or not the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D according to each set value is reached until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery in the non-time saving state that has been transferred after the big hit game is completed. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 makes an appropriate determination (see FIG. 39). On the other hand, if the time-saving jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the executed jackpot game is completed, the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and then executed. When the game is completed, the time-saving jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when the executed jackpot game is completed, the time-saving small hit 2 is won in the second special symbol lottery, and then executed. When the big hit game is finished, the time saving big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, and when the executed big hit game is finished, or the time saving small hit 3 is won in the second special symbol lottery. , Of the cases where the executed jackpot game is completed, in any case, the time is shortened after the jackpot game is completed. In these cases, until the number of electric support times becomes 0 and the state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state, the game depends on whether or not the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D set to "∞" is reached. The control microcomputer 101 appropriately determines whether or not the electric chew abnormality winning detection is detected. Then, after the number of times of electric support becomes 0 and the state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state, until the next big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the electric chew 12D corresponding to each set value is set. Depending on whether or not the threshold value of the number of winnings is reached, the game control microcomputer 101 appropriately determines whether or not the electric chew abnormality winning is detected.

Next, when the set value "1" is set using FIG. 40 (A), the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is set to the set value "from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning. The threshold values (20, see FIG. 39) corresponding to "1" will be described. In addition, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 40 (A), when the time saving state is once shifted to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game and the number of electric support times becomes 0 and the non-time saving state is reached, or directly after the end of the big hit game. It is assumed that the non-time saving state is reached.

First, when any of the setting value "1", the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", the setting value "5", or the setting value "6" is set. However, the electric chew abnormal winning judgment period during which the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and the game control microcomputer 101 can determine that the electric chew is an abnormal winning is the next after the end of one big hit game. It is up to the big hit by lottery of special symbols. However, since the jackpot winning probabilities corresponding to the above-mentioned set values are different, the period from the end of one jackpot game to the jackpot winning in the next special symbol lottery is different for each set value. In some cases.

When the set value "1" shown in FIG. 40 (A) is set, the big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the electric chew abnormal winning judgment period from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning. When the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (20 pieces, see FIG. 39) corresponding to the set value "1", the game control microcomputer 101 detects an abnormal winning to the electric chew 12D. Is judged. As a result, the winning of the electric chew 12D is invalidated (see FIG. 39). Subsequently, an error detection command "E1H16H" is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the game control microcomputer 101 in order to notify the abnormality. After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 will perform error notification, which will be described later.

Next, when the set value "6" is set using FIG. 40 (B), the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is set to the set value "6" from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning. A threshold value (10, see FIG. 39) corresponding to the above will be described. In addition, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 40 (B), when the time saving state is once shifted to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game and the number of electric support times becomes 0 and the non-time saving state is reached, or directly after the end of the big hit game. It is assumed that the non-time saving state is reached.

When the set value "6" shown in FIG. 40 (B) is set, the big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the electric chew abnormal winning judgment period from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning. When the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (10 pieces, see FIG. 39) corresponding to the set value "6", the game control microcomputer 101 detects an abnormal winning to the electric chew 12D. Is judged. As a result, the winning of the electric chew 12D is invalidated (see FIG. 39). Subsequently, an error detection command "E1H16H" is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the game control microcomputer 101 in order to notify the fraud. After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 will perform error notification, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 40, if the game is played in a non-time saving state, the jackpot winning probability is about 1 / of the case where the set value "1" is set, which is the jackpot winning probability of about 1/301. When the set value "6" which is 200 is set, the electric chew abnormality winning determination period is often longer. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), if the set value is set to "1", a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol than when the set value "6" is set. Since it takes a long time to complete, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D (20 pieces, see FIG. 39) is set according to the set value "1", so that the player can play the game appropriately. It will be possible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), if the set value is set to "6", a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol than when the set value "1" is set. Since the time required to do this is short, the threshold value for the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D (10, see FIG. 39) is set according to the set value "6", so that the player can play the game appropriately. Is possible.

12. About error notification As described above, when the game control microcomputer 101 detects an error, it transmits an error detection command (see FIG. 16) to the effect control board 120. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 is adapted to notify an error of which fraud has been performed or which abnormality has occurred based on the received error detection command. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 can display an error image showing an error number and characters according to the error content on the display screen 50a, and can output an illegal voice from the speaker 620. Further, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 are turned on or off in an illegal light emitting mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16, when magnetic detection is performed, the first error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This first error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 1 (error number), magnetic detection error, please turn on the power again" together with a red background. Further, the game stop sound is output from the speaker 620. Further, the entire frame lamp is made to emit light in a white light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. In this way, by displaying the first error character image, outputting the game stop sound, emitting white light from the frame lamp 212, and turning off the board lamp 54, magnetic detection is detected in the surroundings (employees of the game hall, players around the game, etc.). It is designed to notify you.

Further, when the illegal passage on the exit side of the first prize-winning opening 14 is detected, the second error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This second error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 2, large winning opening abnormal discharge". Also, an error sound is output from the speaker 620. Further, the entire frame lamp 212 is made to emit light in a green light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. In this way, the display of the second error character image, the output of the error sound, the green light emission of the frame lamp 212, and the extinguishing of the panel lamp 54 are used to notify the surroundings of the detection of illegal passage on the exit side of the first prize opening 14. It has become.

When the radio wave is detected, the third error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This third error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 3, illegal radio wave detection". Also, an error sound is output from the speaker 620. Further, the entire frame lamp 212 is made to emit light in a green light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. In this way, the radio wave detection is notified to the surroundings by displaying the third error character image, outputting the error sound, emitting green light from the frame lamp 212, and turning off the panel lamp 54.

When the door opening is detected, the fourth error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This fourth error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 4, the door is open". In addition, the voice "The door is open" is output from the speaker 620. Further, the entire frame lamp 212 is made to emit light in a yellow light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. In this way, the door open detection is notified to the surroundings by displaying the fourth error character image, outputting the error sound, emitting yellow light from the frame lamp 212, and turning off the panel lamp 54.

When vibration is detected, a fifth error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This fifth error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 5, vibration detection abnormality". No illegal voice is output from the speaker 620. Further, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 have the same light emitting mode as before the vibration detection was performed. In this way, the vibration detection is notified to the surroundings by displaying the fifth error character image.

Further, when the electric chew abnormality winning is detected, the sixth error character image EH (see FIG. 41 (B)) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This sixth error character image EH is an image showing the characters "Error 6, Electric Chu Abnormal Winning". Further, the entire frame lamp 212 is made to emit light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. No illegal voice is output from the speaker 620. In this way, the door open detection is notified to the surroundings by displaying the sixth error character image, emitting blue light from the frame lamp 212, and turning off the panel lamp 54.

Further, when an illegal winning opening (1st major winning opening 14 or 2nd major winning opening 15) is detected, a 7th error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This 7th error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 7, Large winning opening abnormal winning". Further, the entire frame lamp 212 is made to emit light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. No illegal voice is output from the speaker 620. In this way, the display of the seventh error character image, the blue light emission of the frame lamp 212, and the extinguishing of the panel lamp 54 are used to notify the surroundings of the detection of illegal winning of the large winning opening.

Further, when the detection of illegal passage in a specific area is made, the eighth error character image (not shown) is displayed on the display screen 50a. This eighth error character image is an image showing the characters "Error 8, abnormal passage through a specific area". Further, the entire frame lamp 212 is made to emit light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. No illegal voice is output from the speaker 620. In this way, the display of the eighth error character image, the blue light emission of the frame lamp 212, and the extinguishing of the panel lamp 54 are used to notify the surroundings of the detection of illegal passage in a specific area.

Subsequently, the error notification performed when it is determined by the game control microcomputer 101 that the electric chew abnormality winning detection is performed in the non-time saving state will be described in detail. In this embodiment, it is extremely difficult to make a judgment by the game control microcomputer 101, which is an abnormal winning of the electric chew in a short time state, so that no error notification is performed (see FIG. 39). Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 41, when the time saving state is once shifted to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game and the number of electric support times becomes 0 and the non-time saving state is reached, or the non-time saving state is directly after the end of the big hit game. It is assumed that the case becomes. It should be noted that the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 11 in a non-time saving state, and a variable effect is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. Further, any of the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6" is set. Even in this case, the error notification shown in FIG. 41 can be performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the variable display of the staging symbol EZ (left staging symbol EZ1, middle staging symbol EZ2, right staging symbol EZ3) based on the lottery result of the first special symbol is performed. As shown in FIG. 41 (A), a city background image Ha indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a non-time saving state is displayed on the display screen 50a. By displaying the city background image Ha on the display screen 50a, it is possible to make the player understand that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a non-time saving state. Further, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a normal light emitting mode.

After that, before the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, when the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (see FIG. 39) corresponding to each set value in the non-time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 determines. It is judged that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected. In this case, the sixth error character image EH "Error 6 Electric Chu Abnormal Winning" is displayed on the display screen 50a. By displaying the sixth error character image EH on the display screen 50a, it is possible to make the player, the employee of the game hall, or the like know that the electric chew abnormality winning has been performed. Further, if the sixth error character image EH is displayed on the display screen 50a in the non-time saving state, it should be difficult for the game ball to enter the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state, but the game ball is displayed on the electric chew 12D. It is possible to inform the employees of the amusement park that the prize has been excessively won. As a result, the jackpot game that is executed by winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol is better than the jackpot game that is executed by winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in a non-time saving state. Knowing that it is advantageous for the player (see Fig. 15), let the game hall employees consider the possibility that the player intentionally aimed at the electric chew 12D and made him over-win and cheated. Is possible. Further, with the display of the sixth error character image EH on the display screen 50a, the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 have finished emitting light in the normal light emitting mode, and all of the frame lamp 212 is blue. It is turned on in a light emitting mode, and all of the lighting board lamps 54 are turned off.

Further, when it is determined by the game control microcomputer 101 that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected, the changing effect symbol EZ (left effect symbol EZ1, middle) displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 41 (A). The effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3) move to the lower left of the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 41 (B). As shown in FIG. 41 (B), since the staging symbol EZ (left staging symbol EZ1, middle staging symbol EZ2, right staging symbol EZ3) is changing, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, the city background image Ha displayed on the display screen 50a as shown in FIG. 41A is shown in FIG. 41B even if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the electric chew abnormality winning detection is detected. As such, it remains displayed on the display screen 50a.

When 10 seconds have passed since the error notification shown in FIG. 41 (B) was performed on the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the error notification on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 ends (see FIG. 40). When the error notification ends, the display of the sixth error character image EH displayed on the display screen 50a ends. Along with this, all the frame lamps 212 are turned off in the blue light emitting mode, and all the lighting board lamps 54 are turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), the variable left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, and right effect symbol EZ3 are displayed in the center of the display screen 50a. Further, the city background image Ha is still displayed on the display screen 50a. Further, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light in a normal light emitting mode.

In the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the number of times detected by the sensor that detects the winning of the electric chew reaches the threshold value which is the abnormal number of winnings to the electric chew, it is judged by the game control microcomputer to be illegal. Some of the above-mentioned thresholds are changed depending on the winning probability of ordinary symbols. For example, a jackpot game that is determined to be a jackpot based on the entry of a gaming ball into an electric chew and executed is determined to be a jackpot based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting port other than the electric chew, and is executed. There is a pachinko machine that becomes a player rather than a jackpot game. In such a pachinko gaming machine, by detecting an excessive prize for an excessive electric chew from the end of the big hit game to the next big hit winning with a special symbol, the starting port other than the electric chew is intentionally entered. It was possible to prevent a lottery based on the entry of a game ball. In addition, if the jackpot winning probability is different, the number of changes in the special symbol from the end of the jackpot game to the next jackpot winning with the special symbol will be different. I was trying to change it.

However, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the threshold value for an abnormal number of winnings in the electric chew for one pachinko gaming machine is one value. Assuming that, in a pachinko gaming machine in which the jackpot winning probability is different depending on the set value and the set value can be changed, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol will be different from the end of the jackpot game to the next jackpot winning with the special symbol. That is, depending on the set value, the length of time required to win the special symbol lottery may differ. Therefore, if the threshold value for the abnormal number of winnings to the electric chew is only one value, the abnormal winning of the electric chew should be appropriately grasped by the erroneous detection by the sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the electric chew. May not be possible. When such an erroneous detection occurs, there is a misunderstanding that a player who was playing properly with a pachinko machine whose set value can be changed intentionally won an abnormal prize in the electric chew 12D. Unexpected troubles may occur between the person and the pachinko machine employee.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is different for each set value (see FIG. 39). Further, in the non-time saving state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "1" (about 1/301) ⇒ the jackpot winning probability corresponding to the set value "2" (about 1/280). ⇒Big hit winning probability corresponding to the set value "3" (about 1/260) ⇒Big hit winning probability corresponding to the set value "4" (about 1/240) ⇒Big hit winning probability corresponding to the set value "5" (about 1/240) 1/221) ⇒ In the order of the jackpot winning probability (about 1/200) corresponding to the set value "6", the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the special symbol lottery It is set to be low (see FIG. 39). As a result, even if the jackpot winning differs depending on the set value, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is set according to the set value. It is possible to determine whether or not the chew abnormality winning detection is detected. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose set value can be changed. In this way, the player who was appropriately playing with the pachinko gaming machine whose set value can be changed by erroneous detection by the second start port sensor 12a or accidentally detected by the second start port sensor 12a intentionally enters the electric chew 12D. It is possible to reduce the possibility of unexpected troubles between the player and the employee of the game hall due to a misunderstanding that an abnormal prize has been won.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment is determined to be a hit based on the entry of the game ball into the electric chew 12D, and the big hit game executed thereafter is the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11. It is determined to be a hit based on the ball, which is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot game executed thereafter (see FIG. 15). In addition, in a non-time saving state so that the game ball is intentionally put into the electric chew 12D and the hit is determined based on the ball of the game ball into the electric chew 12D, and the big hit game is not executed thereafter. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the electric chew abnormality winning is detected by the game control microcomputer 101 according to the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D according to the set value. Further, since the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is set according to the set value, it is appropriate if it is appropriately determined by the game control microcomputer 101 that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected in the non-time saving state. It is possible to notify the error (see FIG. 41 (B)).

13. Control operation of pachinko gaming machine Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 70, and the operation of the staging control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 79. First, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 will be described.

[Main control main process] The game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 42 from the game ROM 103 when the power is turned on. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 101 are provided in the game RAM 104. The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

As shown in FIG. 42, in the main control main process, first, the power-on process (S001) described later is performed. Following the power-on processing (S001), interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is executed (S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), various random number counter values shown in FIG. 15 are added and updated by 1. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the effect CPU 122, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, for example, it is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), various counters by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003). The value update process is executed repeatedly. If an interrupt pulse is input to the effect CPU 122 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[Power-on processing] As shown in FIG. 43, in the power-on processing (S001), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets the permission for access to the game RAM 104 (S009). This makes it possible to write and read information to the gaming RAM 104. Next, a setting value designation command for notifying the setting value information (setting value information) stored in the setting value information storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S010). .. As a result, the effect control board 120 receives the set value designation command when the power is turned on, so that the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the set value set in the previous game. However, in the process of step S010, if the set value information is not yet stored in the set value information storage unit 107, the game control microcomputer 101 does not send the set value designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (ON state) (pressed operation is performed) and the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (ON state) (S011). That is, it is determined whether or not the setting change mode transition operation is being executed. If the setting change mode transition operation has been executed (YES in S011), the process proceeds to step S013 through the setting change mode processing (S012) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S011 that the setting change mode transition operation has not been executed (NO in S011), it is subsequently determined whether or not the set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (S016). ). If the set value information is not stored (NO in S016), it means that the set value has never been set, and the process proceeds to the error mode processing (S021) described later. On the other hand, if the set value information is stored (YES in S016), then it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (S017). In short, the process of step S017 is a process of determining whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, although the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. If the RAM clear switch 191 is ON (YES in S017), the process proceeds to step S013.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 191 is not ON (NO in S017), it is subsequently determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (S018). In short, the process of step S018 is a process of determining whether or not the setting key cylinder 180 is in the rotation position, although the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. If the setting key cylinder switch 180a is ON (YES in S018), the setting value confirmation mode process described later is executed (S019), and the process proceeds to step S020. On the other hand, if the setting key cylinder switch 180a is not ON (NO in S018), the RAM clear switch 191 is not pressed and the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotation position when the power is turned on. In this case, the process proceeds to step S020 without executing the setting confirmation mode process in step S019. When the process proceeds to step S020, the power failure recovery process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to step S022.

In step S013, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 is cleared (S013). However, at this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 and the information related to the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of launched balls, information on the total number of prize balls, 1). Information on the previous round, information on the previous round, information on the previous round, and information on the previous round) will not be cleared.

In this way, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the set value information is not cleared, so that the game can be restarted with the set value set before the power failure. That is, it is possible to play a game without shifting to the setting change mode and setting the set value each time the power is turned on. In addition, even if the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the power is turned on, the information related to the base is not cleared, so that the 7-segment display 300 has the same current base as before the power failure, 1 time before base, and 2 times before. It is possible to display the base and the base three times before.

When performing the setting change mode transition operation, YES is determined in step S011 and the process proceeds to step S012. In this case, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 in step S013 is not cleared unless the setting change mode process of step S012 is completed. In short, when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared after the setting change mode is completed. On the other hand, if the setting key cylinder 180 is not in the rotation position when the power is turned on, but the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed, YES is determined in step S017, and the process proceeds to step S013. Become. In this case, the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 can be cleared immediately after the power is turned on.

After step S013, the game control microcomputer 101 initially sets the work area of the game RAM 104 (S014). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. Subsequently, a RAM clear notification command for notifying the clearing of the stored contents of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 (S015), and the process proceeds to step S022. In step S022, as other power-on processing, for example, setting of the effect CPU 122, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like are performed, and this processing is completed.

[Setting change mode processing] As shown in FIG. 44, in the setting change mode processing (S012), the game control microcomputer 101 first sets the effect control board 120 to notify the transition to the setting change mode. Send a mode transition command (S030). Then, it is determined whether or not the set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 (S031). If the set value information is stored (YES in S031), the set value is set before the power failure, so the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information (S032) (Fig.). 26 (B)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for displaying the set value from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 27) to the LED driver 350. In this way, the setting changer can grasp the setting value set before the power failure on the 7-segment display 300 immediately after performing the setting change mode transition operation.

In step S033, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed in the setting change mode. If it is ON (YES in S033), new set value information is stored in the set value information storage unit 107 in order to advance the set value by one (S034). When the RAM clear switch 191 is pressed when the set value is "6", the set value information indicating that the set value is "1" is stored. Subsequently, the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 300 based on the new set value information (S035) (see FIGS. 27 (C) and 27 (D)). This makes it possible for the person who changes the setting to know that the set value has been advanced.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a setting value change command for notifying the effect control board 120 that the setting value has been changed (S036), and the setting value moved up by one. Send the setting value specification command for notifying the information (setting value information) (S037), and proceed to step S038. In step S038, it is determined whether or not the setting key cylinder switch 180a is OFF. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. If it is not OFF (NO in S038), it is not the timing to end the setting change mode yet, so the process returns to step S033. On the other hand, if it is OFF (YES in S038), a setting mode end command for notifying the end of the setting change mode is transmitted to the staging control board 120 (S039). Then, a setting value designation command (confirmed setting information) for notifying the effect control board 120 of the confirmed setting value information (setting value information) is transmitted (S040). Further, the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is set to a non-display mode (S041), and the process proceeds to step S013 (see FIG. 43) described above. In this way, as soon as the setting key cylinder switch 180a is turned off, the set value becomes invisible on the 7-segment display 300, and it is possible to make it difficult for the surroundings to grasp the fixed set value. Since the processing after step S013 is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, there are a total of three timings for transmitting the setting value designation command including the setting value information to the effect control board 120. The first timing is the timing at which the set value designation command is transmitted by the process of step S010 when the power is turned on. The second timing is the timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted by the process of step S037 when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode. The third timing is the timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted by the process of step S040 when the setting value is confirmed with the end of the setting change mode.

In this way, by limiting the timing at which the setting value designation command is transmitted to only three, it is possible to reduce the risk of illegal acquisition of the setting value information to the outside as much as possible. That is, the above-mentioned first timing, second timing, and third timing are from the time the power is turned on until the processing related to the game (game control processing from step S090 to step S096 shown in FIG. 48) is started. It occurs in a short period of time, and it is a timing that does not occur after the game is started. In this way, the setting value designation command is not transmitted from the game control board 100 to the staging control board 120 during business hours (mainly during the game), and the setting value is illegally grasped by skimming for the setting value designation command. It is possible to reduce the risk of being killed as much as possible.

[Set value confirmation mode processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the setting value confirmation mode processing (S019), the game control microcomputer 101 first displays the set value on the 7-segment display 300 based on the set value information ( S050). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the set value is started on the 7-segment display 300. If it has not elapsed (NO in S051), the process of step S051 is repeated, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 300 continues. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S051), the set value displayed on the 7-segment display 300 is hidden (S052), and step S020 (see FIG. ). As described above, in the setting value confirmation mode processing (S019), unlike the setting change mode processing (S012) described above, the setting value is not changed and the current setting value is simply displayed on the 7-segment display 300. Only.

[Process at the time of restoration at the time of power failure] As shown in FIG. 46, in the processing at the time of restoration of power failure (S020), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the power failure flag is ON (S060). The power-off flag is a flag indicating the occurrence of a power-off, and is a flag that is turned on in the power-off monitoring process (see FIG. 68) described later. If the power off flag is not ON (NO in S060), the power may not be cut off normally, so the process proceeds to step S065.

On the other hand, if the power off flag is ON (YES in S060), the checksum of the game RAM 104 is calculated (S061), and the checksum of the game RAM 104 stored (stored) at the time of power failure (S). It is determined whether or not it matches with step S2001 in FIG. 68 (S062). If the values of these checksums do not match (NO in S062), it is determined that the stored contents of the gaming RAM 104 are abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S065. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S062), it is determined that the stored contents of the game RAM 104 are normal, and the process proceeds to step S063.

In step S063, the setting management of the work area of the game RAM 104 at the time of power recovery is performed. In this setting process, the power recovery information is read from the game ROM 103, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power off flag (S064), and proceeds to step S022 (see FIG. 43) described above. Since the processing after step S022 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S065, the information stored in the gaming RAM 104 is cleared. At this time, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 and the information related to the base stored in the base information storage unit 108 (information on the total number of fired balls, information on the total number of prize balls, once). Pre-based information, 2 pre-based information, 3 pre-based information) is not cleared. However, when proceeding to step S065, there is a possibility that the power is not cut off normally, or there is a possibility that the stored contents of the game RAM 104 are abnormal because the checksum values do not match. .. Therefore, instead of the process of step S065, the set value information and the information related to the base may be cleared. In this case, after clearing the set value information, the set value information indicating, for example, "1" may be newly stored in the set value information storage unit 107 as the set value of the initial value. In the process of step S065, if the power off flag set in the gaming RAM 104 is ON, the power off flag is turned off.

After step S065, the work area of the gaming RAM 104 is initially set (S066). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a RAM clear notification command for notifying the effect control board 120 that the stored contents of the game RAM 104 are cleared (S067), and the above-mentioned step S022 (see FIG. 43). ).

[Error Mode Processing] As shown in FIG. 47, in the error mode processing (S021), the game control microcomputer 101 first "E" in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300 (FIG. 31 (A)). Executes error display processing to indicate the characters (see) (S080). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for indicating the character "E" from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28) to the LED driver 350. As a result, in the fourth display area 340 of the 7-segment display 300, light is emitted in an error lighting mode so as to represent the character "E". In this way, it is possible to make the employees of the amusement park understand the transition to the error mode by showing the character "E" on the 7-segment display 300.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits an error command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the transition to the error mode (S081). After that, the loop processing is performed without returning to the power-on processing (S001, see FIG. 43). In this way, when the mode shifts to the error mode, the error mode continues until the power is cut off. Therefore, the game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is set when the power is turned on next time and the set value is set.

[Main-side timer interrupt processing] The game control microcomputer 101 repeats the main-side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 48 every short time, for example, 4 msec. First, the game control microcomputer 101 determines a jackpot random number used for the jackpot lottery, a hit type random number for determining the jackpot type, a reach random number for determining whether or not to reach the reach state in the effect symbol variation effect, and a variation pattern. Random number update processing is performed to update the fluctuation pattern random number of the above, the ordinary symbol random number (winning random number) used for the ordinary symbol lottery, and the like (S090). At least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like. If all random numbers are hardware random numbers, software does not need to update the random numbers. Further, the random number generation circuit may be built in the game control microcomputer 101.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an input process (S091). In the input process (S091), various sensors (first start port sensor 11a, second start port sensor 12a, gate sensor 13a, first large winning opening sensor 14a, second large) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The detection signal detected by the winning opening sensor 15a, the specific area sensor 16a, the non-specific area sensor 17a, the general winning opening sensor 10a, and the discharging port sensor 18a (see FIG. 6) is read, and the winning ball according to the type of the winning opening is read. The prize ball command for paying out is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 170.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a security control process (S092) described later, a sensor detection process (S093) described later, a special operation process (S094) described later, and a normal operation process (S095) described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 performs an output process of outputting the command or the like set in each of the above processes to the effect control board 120 or the like (S096). Then, the base calculation process (S097) described later, the base display process (S098) described later, the power failure monitoring process (S099) described later, the distribution member control process (S100) described later, and the specific area sensor detection process (S101) described later. ), Other processing (S102) is executed to finish this processing. As another process (S102), the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 described later, or based on the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 described later. The first special figure holding display 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number thereof.

[Security control process] The security control process (S092) is a process for determining whether or not the above-mentioned eight types of fraud (see FIG. 38) have been performed. As shown in FIG. 49, the game control microcomputer 101 has, in the security control process (S092), the normal electric wave abnormal winning process (S110), the second large winning opening illegal winning process (S111), and the first large winning opening illegal. Winning process (S112), specific area illegal passage processing (S113), first prize opening discharge confirmation processing (S114), door opening processing (S115), magnetic detection processing (S116), illegal radio wave detection processing (S117), impact Execute the detection process (S118).

[Ordinary electric role abnormal winning process] In the ordinary electric role abnormal winning process (S110), first, the current game situation is a big hit by the next first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery from the end of the execution of the jackpot game. Determine if it is a limited period up to. If it is determined that the current game situation is a limited period from the end of the execution of the jackpot game to the winning of the jackpot in the next special symbol lottery, whether or not the passage to the second starting port 12 is detected. (Whether or not the passage of the game ball was detected by the second start opening sensor 12a) is determined, and if there is a passage detection, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the second start opening valid counter is "0". do. The second starting port valid counter is a counter that counts the number of valid winnings to the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the jackpot in the next special symbol lottery by a subtractive method. Is.

If the value of the second starting port valid counter is not "0", the value of the second starting port valid counter is subtracted by "1" to end this process. On the other hand, if the value of the second starting port valid counter is "0", the prize ball is not targeted, so that the winning of the second starting port 12 is invalidated. That is, it is set so that the payout command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 12 is not set. Then, the abnormality detection is set based on the electric chew abnormality winning detection. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H16H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the set value and the value of the second start port effective counter set according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are different. Of the six types of set values, the value of the second start port valid counter set when the time is shortened is "∞" regardless of the set value. Further, the value of the second start port effective counter set when the set value is the set value "1" in the non-time saving state is "20" (see FIG. 39). The value of the second start port valid counter set when the set value is the set value "2" in the non-time saving state is "12" (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of the second start port effective counter set when the set value is the set value "3" in the non-time saving state is "14" (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of the second start port effective counter set when the set value is the set value "4" in the non-time saving state is "16" (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of the second start port effective counter set when the set value is the set value "5" in the non-time saving state is "18" (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of the second start port effective counter set when the set value is the set value "6" in the non-time saving state is "10" (see FIG. 39).

In this embodiment, the value of the second start port effective counter in the non-time saving state is set by winning a special symbol lottery or by determining that the game control microcomputer 101 has won an abnormal electric chew. It is configured to return to the value of the second start port valid counter corresponding to the set value (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of the second start opening effective counter in the time saving state is determined by winning a special symbol lottery or by the game control microcomputer 101 as an electric chew abnormality winning, so that the second start opening effective counter can be used. The value returns to "∞". In addition, when the number of electric support times becomes 0 in the time saving state and the state shifts to the non-time saving state, the value of the second starting port valid counter is the value of the second starting port valid counter corresponding to the set value set from "∞". (See FIG. 39). As described above, by changing the value of the second start port valid counter in the non-time saving state for each set value, the detection omission by the second start port sensor 12a with the jackpot winning probability corresponding to each set value or It is possible to prevent erroneous detection. Further, the second start port effective counter in the non-time reduction state and the second start port effective counter in the time reduction state may be provided separately.

[Illegal winning process of the 2nd big winning opening] In the 2nd big winning opening illegal winning process (S111), first, it is determined whether or not the 2nd big winning opening 15 is open, and if it is open, the illegal winning is done. This process is finished because it is not. On the other hand, if it is not open, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the second large winning opening valid timer is "0". The second large winning opening valid timer is a timer for determining the valid period of winning a prize in the second large winning opening 15. The value obtained by adding the opening time of the 2nd big winning opening 15 and the subsequent few seconds (ball splashing time) at the start of the round game to open the 2nd big winning opening 15 to the 2nd big winning opening valid timer. Is set. Then, with the passage of time, the value of the second large winning opening valid timer is subtracted. If the value of the second large winning opening valid timer is not "0", this process is terminated because it is not an illegal winning. On the other hand, if the value of the 2nd big winning opening valid timer is "0", then whether or not the passage to the 2nd big winning opening 15 is detected (passing of the game ball by the 2nd big winning opening sensor 15a). Whether or not there was a detection) is determined, and if there is no passage detection, this process ends. On the other hand, if the passage is detected, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the second large winning opening valid counter is "0". The second large winning opening valid counter is a counter that counts the number of valid winnings to the second large winning opening 15 by a subtractive method. The second major winning opening valid counter has the largest number of game balls expected to win the second major winning opening 15 in the round game at the start of the round game in which the second major winning opening 15 is opened. The number of game balls (for example, 10) is set.

If the value of the 2nd big winning opening valid counter is not "0", the value of the 2nd big winning opening valid counter is subtracted by "1" (S144), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the second large winning opening valid counter is "0", the winning of the second large winning opening 15 is invalidated because it is not the target of the prize ball. That is, in the prize ball control process (S106) executed after the security control process (S104), the payout command corresponding to the winning to the second large winning opening 15 is set not to be set. Then, the abnormality detection is set based on the detection of illegal winning in the second large winning opening 15. After that, the error detection command indicating "E1H17H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed.

[Illegal Winning Process of the First Grand Prize Opening] In the illegal winning process of the first large winning opening (S112), first, it is determined whether or not the first large winning opening 14 is open. If it is open, this process is completed because it is not an illegal prize. On the other hand, if it is not open, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the first large winning opening valid timer is "0". The first large winning opening valid timer is a timer for determining the valid period of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 14. The value obtained by adding the opening time of the first big winning opening 14 and the subsequent few seconds (ball splashing time) at the start of the round game to open the first big winning opening 14 to the first big winning opening valid timer. Is set. Then, with the passage of time, the value of the first large winning opening valid timer is subtracted. If the value of the 1st big winning opening valid timer is not "0", this process is terminated because it is not an illegal winning. On the other hand, if the value of the 1st big winning opening valid timer is "0", then whether or not the passage to the 1st big winning opening 14 is detected (passing of the game ball by the 1st big winning opening sensor 14a). Whether or not there was a detection) is determined, and if there is no passage detection, this process ends. On the other hand, if the passage is detected, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the first large winning opening valid counter is "0". The first large winning opening valid counter is a counter that counts the number of valid winnings to the first large winning opening 14 by a subtractive method. The 1st big prize opening valid counter has the largest number of game balls expected to win the 1st big winning opening 14 in the round game at the start of the round game that opens the 1st big winning opening 14. The number of game balls (for example, 10) is set.

If the value of the 1st big winning opening valid counter is not "0", the value of the 1st big winning opening valid counter is subtracted by "1" to end this process. On the other hand, if the value of the 1st big winning opening valid counter is "0", the winning of the 1st big winning opening 14 is invalidated because it is not the target of the prize ball. That is, it is set so that the payout command corresponding to the winning of the first large winning opening 14 is not set. Then, the abnormality detection based on the illegal winning detection to the first large winning opening 14 is set. After that, the error detection command indicating "E1H17H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed. In this embodiment, the error detection command (“E1H17H”) set by the first special winning opening illegal winning process (S111) and the error detection command set by the above-mentioned second large winning opening illegal winning process (S111). ("E1H17H") is the same, but may be different.

[Specific area illegal passage processing] In the specific area illegal passage processing (S113), first, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect. The V validity period is a few seconds during the opening of the first large winning opening 14 and after the closing of the first large winning opening 14 in the time saving small hit 1, the time saving small hit 2, the time saving small hit 3, or the normal small hit. It is a period for determining that the passage of the game ball to the specific area 16 is valid. If it is during the V valid period, this process is completed because it is not an illegal passage. On the other hand, if it is not during the V valid period, it is subsequently determined whether or not the passage to the specific area 16 is detected (whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a), and if there is no passage detection, it is determined. This process is completed. On the other hand, if there is a passage detection, the passage of the specific area 16 is invalidated so that the passage to the effective specific area 16 is not prevented. That is, the V flag is set not to be turned on based on the passage to the specific area 16. Then, the abnormality detection is set based on the detection of illegal passage in the specific area. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H18H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed.

[1st Grand Prize Opening Emission Confirmation Process] In the 1st Grand Prize Opening Emission Confirmation Process (S114), first, whether or not the passage to the 1st Grand Prize Opening 14 is detected (game ball by the 1st Grand Prize Opening Sensor 14a). Whether or not there was a passage detection) is determined. If there is a passage detection, the value of the V large winning opening entry / exit counter is added by "1" to see if the passage to the non-specific area 70 is detected (whether the passage of the game ball is detected by the non-specific area sensor 17a). Whether or not) is determined. The V-large winning opening entry / exit counter is a counter for counting the difference between the winning ball and the discharging ball for the first large winning device 14D (first large winning opening 14) having a specific area 16 (V area) inside. .. If there is no passage detection, it is determined whether or not the passage to the non-specific area 70 is detected (whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the non-specific area sensor 17a).

If there is a passage detection for the passage to the non-specific area 70, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the V large winning opening entry / exit counter is "0". If it is not "0", the value of the V large winning opening entry / exit counter is subtracted by "1" to determine whether or not the passage to the specific area 16 is detected (whether or not the game ball has passed by the specific area sensor 16a). ) Is determined. On the other hand, if it is "0", it means that the ball was illegally ejected from the first big winning opening 14, so the abnormality detection is set based on the exit side illegal passage detection of the first big winning opening 14. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H12H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed. On the other hand, if there is no passage detection to the non-specific area 70, it is determined whether or not the passage to the specific area 16 is detected (whether or not the game ball has passed by the specific area sensor 16a).

Next, it is determined whether or not the passage to the specific area 16 is detected (whether or not the game ball has passed by the specific area sensor 16a), and if there is no passage detection, this process ends. If there is a passage detection, it is subsequently determined whether or not the value of the V large winning opening entry / exit counter is "0". If it is not "0", the value of the V-large winning opening entry / exit counter is subtracted by "1" to end this process. On the other hand, if it is "0", it means that there was an illegal ball ejection (illegal passage to the specific area 16) from the first big winning opening 14. Subsequently, the abnormality detection is set based on the detection of illegal passage on the exit side of the first prize-winning opening 14. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H12H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed.

[Door opening process] In the door opening process (S115), first, it is determined whether or not the door opening detection sensor 200 is ON (whether or not the gaming machine frame 2 is open), and if it is ON, the door is opened. Set the abnormality detection based on the detection. The signal in which the door open detection sensor is ON is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the staging control board 120. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H14H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Magnetic detection process] In the magnetic detection process (S116), first, the detection value detected by the magnetic detection sensor 201 is input. Then, based on the input detection value, it is determined whether or not the magnetic detection is due to fraudulent activity. When the change in the magnetic flux density is equal to or more than a preset predetermined value, it is determined that the abnormality is abnormal, and the abnormality detection based on the magnetic detection is set. At this time, the game control status abnormality flag is turned ON. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H11H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed.

[Illegal radio wave detection process] In the illegal radio wave detection process (S117), first, the detection value detected by the radio wave detection sensor 202 is input. Then, based on the input detection value, it is determined whether or not the radio wave is detected due to fraudulent activity. When the frequency of the detected electromagnetic wave is in a predetermined specific frequency range, it is determined that the electromagnetic wave is abnormal, and the abnormality detection is set based on the radio wave detection. After that, an error detection command indicating "E1H13H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this processing is completed.

[Impact detection process] In the impact detection process (S118), first, the detection value detected by the impact detection sensor 203 is input. Then, based on the input detection value, it is determined whether or not the vibration is detected due to fraudulent activity. If the detected acceleration is equal to or higher than the preset specified value, it is determined to be abnormal and the abnormality detection is set based on the vibration detection. After that, the error detection command indicating "E1H15H" (see FIG. 38) is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104, and this process is completed.

[Sensor detection process] As shown in FIG. 50, in the sensor detection process (S093), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a ( S120). If the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S120), the gate passing process (S121) described later is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S120), the game passes the gate passing process (S121) and proceeds to step S122.

In step S122, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a (S122). If the game ball has not won in the second starting port 12 (NO in S122), the process proceeds to step S126, but if the game ball has won in the second starting port 12 (YES in S122), the special figure 2 Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of the second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold provided in the gaming RAM 104) has reached one (the second upper limit number). Is determined (S123). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached one (YES in S123), the process proceeds to step S126, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than one (that is, not). (NO in S123), add 1 to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S124).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S125) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S125), the value of the jackpot random number counter (value of label-TRND-A), the value of the hit type random number counter (value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (label). -The value of TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number value group shown in FIG. 16A is acquired), and the acquired random number values are used as the second value. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the special figure reserved storage unit 105b.

Subsequently, in the sensor detection process (S093), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a (S126). If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 11 (NO in S126), this process is completed, but if the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 (YES in S126), the special figure 1 Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of the first special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold provided in the gaming RAM 104) has reached four (the first upper limit number). Is determined (S127). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S127), this process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S127), Special figure 1 Add "1" to the number of reserved balls (S128).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S129) is performed, and this process is terminated. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S129), the value of the jackpot random number counter (label-TRND-A value) and the value of the hit type random number counter (label-) are the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S125). The value of the TRND-AS value), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC value), and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 16 (A)). A numerical group is acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure 1 in the first special figure reserved storage unit 105a.

[Gate Passing Process] As shown in FIG. 51, in the gate passing process (S121), a counter that counts the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal symbol holdings, specifically, the number of normal drawing holdings provided in the gaming RAM 104). (Value of S131) is 4 or more (S131), and if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S131), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S131), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S132), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S133) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S133), the normal symbol random number counter value (label-TRND-H value, FIG. 16B) is acquired, and the acquired random number value is used in the normal symbol hold storage unit 106 of the gaming RAM 104. Of these, it is stored in the storage area according to the current number of reserved balls for ordinary symbols.

[Normal operation processing] The game control microcomputer 101 performs the normal operation processing (S094) shown in FIG. 52 after the sensor detection processing (S093). In the normal operation process (S094), first, it is determined whether or not the electric chew 12D is in operation (S141). If the electric chew is not in operation (NO in S141), then it is determined whether or not the stop display of the normal symbol is in progress (S142). If the normal symbol is not displayed as stopped (NO in S142), it is subsequently determined whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S143). Unless the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed (NO in S143), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S144). If the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (YES in S144), this process ends.

If the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is not "0" in step S144 (NO in S144), the collision detection process (S145) is performed. In the hit determination process (S145), the normal symbol random number counter value (label-TRND-H value) stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 106 is read out, and the normal symbol hit determination table (hit) shown in FIG. 18 (B) is read. It is determined whether or not the determination value is a hit based on "1" to "65535"). The probability of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols in this embodiment is about 1/3 (see FIG. 18 (B)). Then, a symbol determination process is performed in which the normal symbol stop symbol data according to the result of the hit determination is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 104 (S146). That is, in the symbol determination process (S146), if it is "missing", the data corresponding to the "normal drawing losing symbol" is set, and if it is "hit", the data corresponding to the "normal winning symbol" is set.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (S147). In the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (S147), referring to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 18C, if the game state is a time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second. Select a pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of normally symbol reserved balls by 1 (S148). Then, the storage location (storage area) of each normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 106 is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the storage corresponding to the fourth hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 106 is performed. Clear the area (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S149). In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order in which it was held. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 starts the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in step S147 (S150). Along with this, a command to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set in order to notify the effect control board 120 of the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

If the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being displayed in step S143 described above (YES in S143), it is subsequently determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S151), and if not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S151), the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped at the display result (normal hit symbol or normal lost symbol) according to the judgment result of the normal symbol random number (S152). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation stop command for notifying the normal symbol fluctuation stop is set on the effect control board 120 (S153), and the normal symbol stop time is set (S154), and this process is completed.

If the stop display of the normal symbol is being displayed in step S142 (YES in S142), then it is determined whether or not the stop time of the normal symbol set in step S154 has elapsed (S155), and the process has elapsed. If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S155), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol data of the normal hit symbol is set (S156), and if it is not the normal hit symbol data (that is, if it is not a hit). (NO in S156)), this process is completed. On the other hand, if it is the data of the normal hit symbol (that is, if it is a hit (YES in S156)), the open pattern of the electric chew 12D is set (S157). Specifically, if it is in the time saving state, the opening pattern in the time saving state (see the electric chew opening TBL2 in FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D. On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state (see the electric chew opening TBL1 in FIG. 20) is set as the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D. Then, the electric chew 12D is operated according to the opening pattern set in step S157 (S158).

Further, if the electric chew 12D is operating in step S141 described above (YES in S141), it is subsequently determined whether or not the operating time of the electric chew 12D has elapsed (S159), and if not. Finish the process. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S159), the operation of the electric chew 12D is terminated (S160).

[Special operation processing] The game control microcomputer 101 performs the special operation processing (S095) shown in FIG. 53 after the normal operation processing (S094). In the special operation processing (S095), the processing related to the special figure display 81 and the large winning opening device (first special winning device 14D and second large winning device 15D) is divided into five stages, and "special operation" is performed in each of these stages. Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 "is assigned. Then, when the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S161), the special symbol standby process (S162) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S161). , S163 for YES), special symbol change processing (S164), and if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO for both S161 and S163, YES for S165), special symbol confirmation processing (S166) ), And if the "special operation status" is "4" (NO for S161, S163, S165, YES for S167), special electric accessory processing 1 (S168) as a jackpot game is performed, and " When the "special operation status" is "5" (all of S161, S163, S165, and S167 are NO), the special electric accessory processing 2 (S169) as a small hit game is performed. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 54, in the special symbol standby process (S162), first, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 12 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is "0". Is determined (S171). Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S171), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12, the first starting It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 11 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is "0" (S177). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S177), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 11, the customer It is determined whether or not the wait flag is ON (S185). If it is ON (YES in S185), this process is completed, and if it is not ON (NO in S185), the customer wait command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S186), and the customer wait flag is turned ON (S18). S187), this process is completed.

When the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is not "0" in step S171 (NO in S171), that is, the memory of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12 (holding information in special figure 2). ) Is one or more, the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S172) and the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S173), which will be described later, are performed. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 by 1 (S174). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 105b is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the first reservation in the second special figure reservation storage unit 105b is performed. Clear the storage area corresponding to (S175). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S176), and proceeds to step S183. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S176), the special operation status is set to “2” and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The fluctuation start command (also referred to as the special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S176) is the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S172). Information and information on the fluctuation pattern set in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S173) (information including information on the fluctuation time) are included.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S171 and NO in S177), that is, there is no reserved information in Special Figure 2, but the number is higher. When there is one or more storages (holding information of special figure 1) of the random number counter value group acquired due to the winning of the 1 starting port 11, the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S178) and the special figure described later are performed. 1 Perform the variation pattern selection process (S179). After that, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 by 1 (S180). Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 105a is shifted by one to the side read from the current position, and the fourth reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 105a is performed. Clears the storage area corresponding to (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S181). In this way, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S182), and proceeds to step S183. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S182), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. The fluctuation start command (also referred to as the special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S182) is the special figure stop symbol data set in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S178). Information and information on the fluctuation pattern set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S179) (information including information on the fluctuation time) are included.

In step S183, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is ON, the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S184), and the process is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S171). That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit Judgment Process (Special Figure 1 Big Hit Judgment Process)] Special Figure 2 Big Hit Judgment Process (S172) and Special Figure 1 Big Hit Judgment Process (S178) are based on FIG. 55 because the processing flow is the same. I will explain them all together. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S172) or the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S178), first, the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A value) is read out as the determination value (S191). ). Specifically, in the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S192), the jackpot random number counter value stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 105b of the gaming RAM 104 is read out. Further, in the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S178), the jackpot random number counter stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 105a (specifically, the storage area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the gaming RAM 104. Read the value.

Next, the jackpot determination table (see FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (F)) is set (S192). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set jackpot determination table (S193). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A) matches any of the jackpot determination values (see FIGS. 17A to 17F). If the result of the jackpot determination (S193) is "big hit", the jackpot flag is turned ON (S194), and the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read out to determine the hit type shown in FIG. The hit type is determined based on the table (S195). After determining the jackpot type (S195), the special symbol stop symbol data (see FIG. 15) corresponding to the jackpot type (type of jackpot symbol) is set in the hit type buffer provided in the game RAM 104 and processed (S196). To finish.

On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination (S193) is not "big hit", it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S197). Specifically, in the special figure 2 big hit determination process (S172), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number counter value matches the small hit determination value (see FIGS. 17A to 17F). Further, in the special figure 1 big hit determination process (S178), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number counter value matches any of the small hit determination values (see FIGS. 17A to 17F). The probability of winning a small hit is higher in the lottery of special figure 2 than in the lottery of special figure 1.

If the result of the small hit determination (S197) is "small hit", the small hit flag is turned ON (S198), and the hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS value) is read out and shown in FIG. The small hit type is determined based on the hit type determination table (S199). After determining the small hit type (S199), the special symbol stop symbol data (see FIG. 15) corresponding to the small hit type (small hit symbol type) is set in the hit type buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (see FIG. 15). S200) Finish the process. A random number that determines whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the big hit random number.

Also, if it is not a big hit (NO in S193) and it is not a small hit (NO in S197), it is a "miss", so set the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) according to the lost symbol (S201), This process is completed. In this embodiment, it is set so that the result may be "missing" in the lottery of the special figure 1 or the lottery of the special figure 2 (see FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (F)).

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process (Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process)] Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process (S173) and Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Pattern Selection Process (S179) have the same processing flow. It will be described collectively with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S173) or the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S179), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON). (S251).

If it is not in the time saving state (NO in S251), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, it is subsequently determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S252). If it is ON (YES in S252), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-) is referred to in the non-time saving state medium jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the value of TRND-T1 (S253). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided.

Further, in step S252, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S252), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S254). If it is ON (YES in S254), refer to the non-time saving state small and medium-sized hit table (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19) based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value. Select the variation pattern (S255).

Further, in step S254, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S254), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC value) is the reach establishment random number value (S256). As shown in FIG. 18A, the reach establishment random number values are "1" to "30" in the time-saving state and "1" to "10" in the non-time-saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach the loss time than the non-time-saving state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure hold by allowing more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time saving state. When the reach random number counter value is the reach establishment random number value (YES in S256), that is, in the case of the loss with reach, the loss table with reach during the non-time reduction state (the non-time reduction state among the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 19). And, referring to the part corresponding to the loss with reach), the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S257).

On the other hand, when the reach random number counter value is not the reach establishment random number value (NO in S256), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the non-reach loss table in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction among the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 19). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the state and the part corresponding to the non-reach loss (S258). At the time of this loss without reach, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2" is selected. It is supposed to be done.

Further, in step S251, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the time saving state (YES in S251), as shown in FIG. 57, the variation pattern determination table to be referred to is set to the table in the time saving state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 19). Processing (S259 to S265) is performed in the same flow as in steps S252 to S258 above, except that the part of the judgment table corresponding to the time saving state) is set. That is, if the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S259), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value is referred to in the time-saving state medium jackpot table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19 corresponding to the time-saving state and the jackpot). Select a variation pattern based on (S260).

If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S261), refer to the time-saving state medium-small hit table (the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19 corresponding to the time-saving state and small hit), and the fluctuation pattern random number counter. Select a variation pattern based on the value (S262). If the reach random number counter value is a reach-established random number value (YES in S263), refer to the reach loss table (the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19 corresponding to the time reduction state and reach loss). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S264). If the reach random number counter value is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S263), refer to the reach-less loss table in the time-saving state (the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19 corresponding to the time-saving state and no reach loss). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S265).

In the fluctuation pattern determination table during the time reduction state (the part corresponding to the time reduction state in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19), the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls at the time of loss without reach is the number of reserved balls. It works when "2" to "4". That is, the shortened variation is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving state is a table in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the selected variation pattern is set (S266), and the present process is completed. The fluctuation pattern information set in step S266 is included in the fluctuation start command set in step S176 or S182 in the special symbol standby process (S162).

[Process during special symbol change] As shown in FIG. 58, in the special symbol change process (S164), first, the change time of the special symbol (the change time determined according to the change pattern selected in step S173 or S179, FIG. 19). (See) is determined whether or not it has passed (S301). If it has not passed (NO in S301), this process is finished immediately. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S301), the fluctuation stop command is set (S302), and the special operation status is set to "3" (S303). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at the symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol or lost symbol) corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (S304), this Finish the process.

[Special symbol determination process] As shown in FIG. 59, in the special symbol determination process (S166), first, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (S401). If it has not passed (NO in S401), this process is finished immediately. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S401), the game state management process described later is performed (S402).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S403). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S403), set the special operation status to "4" (S404). Then, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S405), and if it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S407, but if it is ON, the time saving flag is turned off (S406) and the process proceeds to step S407. .. As a result, the non-time saving state is controlled during the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

After that, in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S407) and start the jackpot game opening (S408). Following step S408, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 15 for details) according to the type of winning jackpot (S409). At this time, the value of the big winning opening opening counter that counts the number of opening of the big winning opening during the special game is set to the value corresponding to the type of the winning big hit. The open pattern set (data set according to the open pattern) may be performed for each round.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON in step S403 (NO in S403), it is subsequently determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S410). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S410), the special operation status is set to "5" (S411). When the small hit flag is ON, it is not turned OFF even if the time saving flag is ON. After that, in order to start the small hit game, the small hit opening command is set (S412), and the small hit game opening is started (S413).

Following step S413, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 15 for details) according to the type of winning small hit (S414). At this time, the value of the large winning opening opening counter is set to the value corresponding to the type of the winning small hit. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns on the distribution member operation flag (S415), and ends this process. The distribution member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period during which the distribution member 16k is operated. That is, in this embodiment, the operation of the distribution member 16k is started at the opening of the small hit game. The operation pattern of the distribution member will be described in detail later.

If the small hit flag is not ON in step S410 (NO in S410), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game starts, so the special operation status is set to "1" (S416) and this process ends.

[Game state management process] As shown in FIG. 60, in the game state management process (S402), it is first determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S501), and if it is ON, the special symbol change executed during the time saving state. The value of the time reduction counter that counts the number of times is decremented by 1 (S502), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (S503). If it is "0", the time saving flag is turned off (S504). In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the value of the time saving counter is set to "99" at the time of transition to the time saving state. This point will be described later. After that, in step S1705, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the game state designation command including the game state information just set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and ends this process.

[Special electric bonus processing 1 (big hit game)] The special electric bonus processing 1 is a process for executing a jackpot game (second special game) such as a type 1 jackpot game or a type 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special electric accessory processing 1 (S168), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S601). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the second jackpot winning device 15D has been completed in the winning jackpot game.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S601), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 15 is open (that is, whether or not the second big winning device 15D is open) (S602). If it is not open (NO in S602), it is time to open the 2nd prize opening 15, that is, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the opening of the 2nd prize opening 15 is started. It is determined whether the time has been reached, or whether the time between the openings has elapsed and the time to start the next opening has been reached (S603).

If the determination result in step S603 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S603 is YES, the second large winning opening 15 is opened according to the set opening pattern (S604).

If the second major winning opening 15 is being opened in step S602 (YES in S602), the number of winnings to the second major winning opening 15 in the unit opening game becomes the specified maximum winning number (8 in this embodiment). Determine if it has been reached (S605). If the specified number of winnings has not been reached (NO in S605), it is time to close the second major winning opening 15 (that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the second major winning opening 15 (see FIG. 15). ) Has passed or not) is determined (S606). Then, if the opening time of the second winning opening 15 has not elapsed (NO in S606), this processing is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of winnings has been reached (YES in S605) or when the opening time of the second big winning opening 15 has elapsed (YES in S606), that is, either of the two opening end conditions is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the second big winning opening 15 is closed (closed) (S607). Then, the value of the large winning opening opening counter is decremented by 1 (S608), and it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "0" (S609). If it is not "0" (NO in S609), the process is finished as it is in order to start the next opening.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S609), the ending command of the jackpot is set (S610) and the ending of the jackpot is started (S611) in order to end the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot end flag is set and the process is completed (S612).

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S601 (YES in S601), all the opening of the second jackpot 15 in the jackpot game has been completed, so it is determined whether or not the ending time of the jackpot has passed. If the ending time has not passed (NO in S613), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S613), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S614) and the jackpot flag is turned off (S615). Then, after setting the special operation status to "1" (S616), the game state setting process (S617) described later is performed, and this process is completed.

[Game state setting process] As shown in FIG. 62, in the game state setting process (S617), first, the big hit game executed this time is a time saving hit (that is, "4R time saving big hit", "time saving small hit 11", "time saving small hit". It is determined whether or not the game is a big hit game executed by winning 2 ”,“ 9R time saving big hit ”, or“ time saving small hit 3 ”) (S701). If the determination result in step S701 is YES, the time saving flag is turned ON (S702), "99" is set in the time saving counter (S703), and this process is completed. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a time-saving state and a high base state (privilege game state). This privileged game state ends when either the condition that the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 99 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S701 is NO, this process ends without performing steps S702 and S703.

[Special electric bonus processing 2 (small hit game)] The special electric bonus processing 2 is for executing a small hit game (first special game) that opens the first large winning device 14D provided with the specific area 16. It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, in the special electric accessory process 2 (S169), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S801). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the first large winning device 14D has been completed in the small hit game.

If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S801), it is determined whether or not the first large winning opening 14 is open (that is, whether or not the first large winning device 14D is open) (S802). If it is not open (NO in S802), it is time to open the 1st big prize opening 14, that is, the time of the predetermined pre-opening interval (opening of the small hit) has passed and the 1st big winning opening It is determined whether or not it is time to start opening 14 (S803).

If the determination result in step S603 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S603 is YES, the first large winning opening 14 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 15) according to the type of winning small hit (S804).

If the first prize opening 14 is open in step S802 (YES in S802), whether or not the number of prizes in the first prize opening 14 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (8 in this embodiment). Is determined (S805). If the specified number of winnings has not been reached (NO in S805), it is time to close the first big winning opening 14 (that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the first big winning opening 14 (Fig. 15). As shown, whether or not 1.6 seconds) has elapsed in this embodiment) is determined (S806). Then, if the opening time of the first large winning opening 14 has not elapsed (NO in S806), this process is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of winnings has been reached (YES in S805) or when the opening time of the first large winning opening 14 has elapsed (YES in S806), that is, either of the two opening end conditions is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the first large winning opening 14 is closed (closed) (S807). Then, the value of the large winning opening opening counter is decremented by 1 (S808), the small hit end flag is set (S809), and this process is completed.

If the small hit end flag is ON in step S801 (YES in S801), as shown in FIG. 64, the predetermined time after closing the first big winning opening 14 in the small hit game (time of the interval after closing) is It is determined whether or not it has passed (S900), and if the time of the interval after closing has not elapsed (NO in S900), the process ends. The time of the interval after closing the small hit game will be described later. On the other hand, if the time of the interval after closing has elapsed (YES in S900), the small hit end flag is turned off (S901), the small hit flag is turned off (S902), and the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON. The V flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 during the execution of the small hit game, and is a flag turned on in step S2603 (see FIG. 70) described later. If this V flag is not ON (NO in S903), the value of the big winning opening opening counter is cleared to "0" (S904) and the special operation status is set to "1" because the two-kind jackpot game is not executed. Set (S905) and finish the process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON (YES in S903), the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the V flag (S907) and turns on the jackpot flag (S908) in order to execute the two-kind jackpot game. , Set the special operation status to "4" (S909). Then, if the time saving flag is ON (YES in S910), the time saving flag is turned off (S911). Then, the jackpot opening command is set (S912) and the jackpot opening is started (S913). As a result, the small hit game in which the first big winning opening 14 is opened for a short time is changed to the two-kind big hit game.

[Base calculation processing] As shown in FIG. 65, in the base calculation processing (S097), the game control microcomputer 101 first executes a firing ball number counting process (S1001). In the launch ball count process (S1001), the value of the launch ball counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is increased based on the detection signal from the ejection port sensor 18a. However, in this embodiment, since the base is calculated in the normal gaming state, the value of the number of shot balls counter is increased only in the normal gaming state. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of fired balls is a multiple of 10000, that is, whether or not the value of the number of fired balls counter is a multiple of 10000 such as 10000, 20000, 30000, 40,000, 50000, 60000 (S1001). ). If it is not a multiple of 10000 shots (NO in S1001), proceed to step S1003. On the other hand, if it is a multiple of 10,000 shots (YES in S1001), a setting suggestion condition establishment command for notifying the effect control microcomputer 121 that the number of shot balls has become a multiple of 10,000 shots is set in the game RAM 104. (S1002).

Subsequently, in step S1003, the total prize ball count processing is executed. In the total prize ball count processing (S1003), the detection signals from the first start port sensor 11a, the second start port sensor 12a, the first big winning opening sensor 14a, the second big winning opening sensor 15a, and the general winning opening sensor 10a. Based on the above, the value of the total prize ball count counter provided in the gaming RAM 104 is increased by a value corresponding to the number of prize balls. However, in this embodiment, since the base is calculated in the normal gaming state, the value of the total prize ball counter is increased by the value corresponding to the number of prize balls only in the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 11 is "3", the number of winning balls for winning the second starting port 12 is "1", and the first large winning opening 14 or The number of prize balls for winning the second major winning opening 15 is "8", and the number of winning balls for winning the general winning opening 10 is "5", but the number of these prize balls can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the current base arithmetic processing is executed (S1004). In the current base calculation process (S1004), the current base (%) is calculated by dividing the value of the total prize ball counter by the value of the launch ball counter and multiplying by 100. Then, the calculated current base information (current base information) is stored in the base information storage unit 108.

After step S1004, it is determined whether or not the number of launched balls has reached 60,000, that is, whether or not the value of the number of launched balls counter is 60,000 or more (S1005). If the number of shots has not reached 60,000 (NO in S1005), this process ends. On the other hand, if the number of shots reaches 60,000 (YES in S1005), the base information stored in the base information storage unit 108 is shifted and stored (S1006).

Specifically, if the information of the third pre-base information (three-time pre-base information) is stored, the third pre-base information is cleared. Further, if the information of the two-time pre-base (two-time pre-base information) is stored, the two-time pre-base information is stored as the three-time pre-base information. Further, if the information of the one-time pre-base (one-time pre-base information) is stored, the one-time pre-base information is stored as the two-time pre-base information. In addition, the current base information (current base information) is stored as the previous base information.

After step S1006, the value of the number of shot balls counter is cleared (S1007), the value of the total number of prize balls counter is cleared (S1008), and this process is completed. In this way, every time the number of fired balls reaches 60,000, the number of fired balls and the total number of prize balls are reset, and the current base calculation is performed.

[Base display process] As shown in FIG. 66, in the base display process (S098), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the initial display end flag is ON (S1500). The initial display flag is a flag indicating that the initial display on the 7-segment display 300 has been completed. If the initial display end flag is not ON (NO in S1500), the 7-segment display 300 executes the initial display process for executing the initial display (S1501). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits serial data for lighting all the lighting portions LB1 to LB32 of the 7-segment display 300 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28) to the LED driver 350. .. In this way, as shown in FIG. 27 (F), by executing the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, it is confirmed that the 7-segment display 300 itself is not malfunctioning, malfunctioning, or improperly modified. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the initial display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S1502). If it has not passed (NO in S1502), this process is terminated in order to continue the initial display on the 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S1502), it is the timing to end the initial display on the 7-segment display 300, and the base display flag is currently turned ON (S1503). The current base display flag is a flag indicating that the current base is displayed on the 7-segment display 300. After step S1503, the initial display end flag is turned ON (S1504) to end this process.

If the initial display flag is ON in step S1500 (YES in S1500), the process proceeds to step S1505 to determine whether or not the base display flag is currently ON (S1505). If the current base display flag is ON (YES in S1505), the current base display process for displaying the current base is executed on the 7-segment display 300 (S1506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "bL." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the current base in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the base can be grasped by the 7-segment display 300 at present, and it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a failure, a malfunction, or an unauthorized modification. It is possible.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the current base display was started on the 7-segment display 300 (S1507). If it has not passed (NO in S1507), this process is terminated in order to continue the display of the current base on the 7-segment display 300. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S1507), it is the timing to end the display of the current base on the 7-segment display 300, and the previous base display flag is turned ON (S1508). The one-time previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the one-time previous base has been reached. After step S128, the current base display flag is turned off (S1509), and this process ends.

If the base display flag is not currently ON in step S1505 (NO in S1505), the process proceeds to step S1510 shown in FIG. 67, and it is determined whether or not the previous base display flag is ON. If the previous base display flag is ON (YES in S1510), it is subsequently determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the previous base information (S1511). If there is a memory (YES in S1511), the one-time pre-base display process for displaying the one-time pre-base is executed on the 7-segment display 300 (S1512). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b1." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base once in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, with the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base but also the previous base can be grasped as shown in FIG. 32 (C), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a failure, malfunction, or unauthorized modification. It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not it has been applied.

On the other hand, in step S1511, if it is determined that the previous base information is not stored (NO in S1511), the one-time previous base non-display process is executed (S1513). In this one-time pre-base non-display process (S1513), the game control microcomputer 101 blinks from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28) in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. "." Is displayed, and serial data for displaying "---" in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), the 7-segment display 300 cannot yet grasp the previous base once.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous base display process (S1512) or the previous base non-display process (S1513) (S1514). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1514), this process is terminated in order to continue the one-time previous base display process (S1512) or the one-time previous base non-display process (S1513). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S1514), the previous base display flag is turned ON twice (S1515). The 2nd previous base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 2nd previous base has been reached. After step S1515, the previous base display flag is turned off (S1516), and this process is completed.

If the previous base display flag is not ON in step S1510 (NO in S1510), the process proceeds to step S1517 to determine whether or not the previous base display flag is ON. If the two-time previous base display flag is ON (YES in S1517), it is subsequently determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the two-time previous base information (S1518). If there is a memory (YES in S1518), the two-time pre-base display process for displaying the two-time pre-base is executed on the 7-segment display 300 (S1519). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b2." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base twice in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, the 7-segment display 300 can grasp not only the current base and the one-time front base but also the two-time front base as shown in FIG. 32 (D), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a failure or malfunction. Alternatively, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not an unauthorized modification has been performed.

On the other hand, in step S1518, if it is determined that the previous base information is not stored twice (NO in S1518), the two-time previous base non-display process is executed (S1520). In this two-time pre-base non-display process (S1520), the game control microcomputer 101 blinks from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28) in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. "." Is displayed, and serial data for displaying "---" in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 33 (D), the 7-segment display 300 cannot yet grasp the previous base twice.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the two-time pre-base display process (S1519) or the two-time pre-base non-display process (S1520) (S1521). ). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1521), this process is terminated in order to continue the two-time pre-base display process (S1519) or the two-time pre-base non-display process (S1520). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S1521), turn on the base display flag three times before (S1522). The 3 times before base display flag is a flag indicating that the display timing of the 3 times before base has been reached. After step S1522, the previous base display flag is turned off twice (S1523), and this process is completed.

If the 2nd previous base display flag is not ON in step S1517 (NO in S1517), the process proceeds to step S1524 to determine whether or not the 3rd previous base display flag is ON. It should be noted that in step S1524, it is not substantially determined that the three-time previous base display flag is not ON. That is, when the process proceeds to step S1524, the base display flag three times before is ON, so the process always proceeds to step S1525. In step S1525, it is determined whether or not the base information storage unit 108 stores the previous base information three times. If there is a memory (YES in S1525), the 7-segment display 300 executes the 3 times previous base display process for displaying the 3 times previous base (S1526). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 displays "b3." In the lighting mode in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320 from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28), and displays the third display. Serial data for displaying the previous base three times in the area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. In this way, with the 7-segment display 300, not only the current base, the one-time front base, and the two-time front base, but also the three-time front base can be grasped as shown in FIG. 32 (E), and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be grasped. It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not a malfunction, malfunction, or unauthorized modification has been performed.

On the other hand, in step S1525, if it is determined that the three-time previous base information is not stored (NO in S1525), the three-time previous base non-display process is executed (S1527). In this three-time pre-base non-display process (S1527), the game control microcomputer 101 blinks from the serial data transmission terminal TX3 (see FIG. 28) in the first display area 310 and the second display area 320. "." Is displayed, and serial data for displaying "---" in the lighting mode in the third display area 330 and the fourth display area 340 is transmitted to the LED driver 350. At this time, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), the 7-segment display 300 still cannot grasp the previous base three times.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a specific time (4.8 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the three-time previous base display process (S1525) or the three-time previous base non-display process (S1527) (S1528). ). If it has not passed (NO in S1528), this process is terminated in order to continue the three-time previous base display process (S1526) or the three-time previous base non-display process (S1527). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S1528), the current base display flag is turned ON (S1529). As a result, in the next base display process (S098), the current base display is started on the 7-segment display 300. After step S1529, the previous base display flag is turned off three times (S1530), and this process is completed.

[Power Off Monitoring Process] In the power off monitoring process (S099), as shown in FIG. 68, the game control microcomputer 101 must first determine whether or not a power off signal has been input (S2000), and has not input it. If (NO in S2000), this process is completed. The power supply cutoff signal is a signal output from the power supply unit 190 if the voltage of the monitored power supply (for example, DC24V) is not detected for a predetermined period (for example, 25 ms). If there is a power off signal input (YES in S2000), the checksum is calculated and stored in the game RAM 104 (S2001), and the power off flag is turned on (S2002). Then, the access prohibition setting to the game RAM 104 is set (S2003). This makes it impossible to write or read information to the gaming RAM 104. After that, loop processing is performed without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (S005, see FIG. 48).

[Distribution member control process] The game control microcomputer 101 performs a distribution member control process (S100) following a power supply cutoff monitoring process (S099) (see FIG. 48). In the distribution member control process (S100), as shown in FIG. 69, first, it is determined whether or not the distribution member operation flag is ON (S2501). If the distribution member operation flag is not ON, this process ends. On the other hand, if the distribution member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small hit game has started (see FIG. 59), so that the distribution member operation process (see FIG. 59) for operating the distribution member 16k in a predetermined operation pattern ( Perform S2502) and perform V validity period setting processing (S2503).

In the distribution member operation process (S2502), a timer for measuring the operation time of the distribution member 16k is set, and the distribution solenoid is set when the distribution member 16k is released at the timing using the timer. 16s is turned on, and when the closing timing of the sorting member 16k is reached, the sorting solenoid 16s is turned off. As a result, the distribution member 16k will move in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small hit game.

Further, in the V valid period setting process (S2503), the V valid period is set for the constant operation of the distribution member 16k as described above. The V valid period is a period in which the V flag is turned ON by regarding the detection by the specific area sensor 16a as valid. The V valid period is from the start of opening of the specific area 16 (when the distribution member 16k is controlled to the allow passage state) to the elapse of a predetermined time. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the specific area 16 (the time during which the distribution member 16k is controlled in the passage allowable state). This is in consideration of the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the distribution member 16k reaches the specific region 16.

Specifically, in the V validity period setting process (S2503), a timer for measuring the V validity period is set, and V is valid when it is time to enable the specific area 16 based on the timekeeping using the timer. The flag is turned on, and when it is time to invalidate the specific area 16, the V valid flag is turned off. In step S2602 of the specific area sensor detection process (S101) described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect by determining whether or not the V valid flag is ON.

Following the V validity period setting process (S2503), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the operation of the distribution member 16k has been completed (S2504). Specifically, the total operating time (28600 ms) from the start to the end of the constant operation of the distribution member 16k is based on the timer for measuring the operation time of the distribution member 16k set in step S2502. Determine if it has passed. Then, if the operation of the distribution member 16k is not completed, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the operation of the distribution member 16k is completed, the distribution member operation flag is turned off (S2505), and then this processing is completed.

In this embodiment, the operation of the distribution member 16k is started with the start of the opening of the small hit game. Then, the small hit game is executed in any of the three open patterns according to the type of small hit. Each opening pattern has a different opening time. Therefore, in each opening pattern, the opening timing of the first large winning opening 14 with respect to the displacement timing of the distribution member 16k is different. Thus, a small hit game that can pass through the specific area 16 regardless of the winning timing to the first large winning opening 14, and passing through the specific area 16 no matter when the first large winning opening 14 is won. It is possible to perform small hit games that cannot be done.

[Specific area sensor detection process] Returning to the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 101. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S101) after the distribution member control process (S100) (see FIG. 49). In the specific area sensor detection process (S101), as shown in FIG. 70, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a (S2601). If there is no detection (NO in S2601), the process ends, but if there is detection (YES in S2601), it is determined whether or not the V is valid (S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (S2503) in the above-mentioned distribution member control process (see FIG. 69).

If it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is in effect (YES in S2602), the V flag is turned ON (S2603), and the V passage command is set (S2604) to end the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2602), the specific area sensor detection process is completed without performing the processes of steps S2603 and S2604. The V-passing command is a command for causing the staging control board 120 to notify the V-passing (passing of the specific area 16).

In parallel with the above processing in the game control microcomputer 101, the staging control microcomputer 121 performs the processing shown in FIGS. 71 to 79. Hereinafter, the operation of the staging control microcomputer 121 will be described.

[Sub-control main process] The staging control microcomputer 121 provided on the staging control board 120 reads and executes the program of the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 71 from the staging ROM 123 when the power is turned on. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the operation description of the staging control microcomputer 121 are provided in the staging RAM 124.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the sub-control main process, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power cutoff flag (flag turned on at the time of power cutoff) is ON and the content of the staging RAM 124 is normal (S4001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the production RAM 124 are not normal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, the production RAM 124 Initialize (S4002) and proceed to step S4003.

On the other hand, if the determination result of step S4001 is YES, that is, if the sub-side power cutoff flag is turned ON due to the power failure, but the contents of the effect RAM 124 are kept normal, then the RAM is cleared. Determine if a notification command has been received (S4011). If the RAM clear notification command has been received (YES in S4011), the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 has been cleared. Therefore, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is cleared (S4002), and the process proceeds to step S4003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S4011), the process proceeds to step S4003 without clearing the effect RAM 124.

Here, in the process of step S4002, when the effect RAM 124 is cleared, the information of the setting value flag 125, which will be described later, is also cleared (erased). The setting value flag 125 allows the effect control microcomputer 121 to grasp the set value as information on the effect side (sub side). Therefore, when the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 clears the effect RAM 124, and at the same time, clears the information of the set value.

In step S4003, other initial settings are made. In other initial settings, for example, the staging CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set. If the sub-side power off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the effect symbol for determining the effect symbol, a random number for determining the variable effect pattern for determining the variable effect pattern, and a random number for determining various advance notice effects. And so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process (S4006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 140 executes various effects (variation effect, opening effect, round effect, jackpot effect including ending effect, etc.) using the image display device 50 according to the command. The staging control microcomputer 121 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Reception interrupt processing] In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the game control board 100 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. And, it is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010). As shown in FIG. 72, in the reception interrupt processing (S4008), various commands transmitted from the game control board 100 are stored in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S4101).

[1 ms timer interrupt process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 73, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), input processing is first performed (S4201). In the input process (S4201), switch data (edge data and level data) are created based on the detection signals from the input unit detection sensor 40a (see FIG. 8) and the select button detection sensor 42a (see FIG. 7).

Subsequently, the lamp data output process is performed (S4202). In the lamp data output processing (S4202), the set lamp data (data that controls the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54) is sent to the sub drive board in order to make the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 emit light at the timing suitable for the production. Output to 162. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 controls the light emission of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54, so that the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 are subjected to a special first light emitting mode (FIGS. 27 (B) (E), as will be described later. ), A special second light emission mode (see FIGS. 27 (C) (D)), a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 27 (F)), and a special error light emission mode (see FIG. 31 (B)). It is possible to make it emit light with.

Next, the drive control process (S4203) is performed. In the drive control process (S4203), drive data is created and output in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a timing suitable for the production. That is, the board movable body 55k is driven in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. Then, the watchdog timer process (S4204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and this process is completed.

[10 ms timer interrupt process] The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. 74, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the effect RAM 124 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 50a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4302) is performed (S4303).

Subsequently, the staging control microcomputer 121 creates voice data (control data for outputting voice from the speaker 620) and executes voice control processing for outputting voice data to the image control board 140 (S4304). By this voice control process (S1304), as will be described later, a voice saying "settings can be changed" (see FIGS. 27 (B) (E)) and a voice saying "setting values have been changed" (FIG. 27 (C)). ) (See (D)), the voice "The set value has been confirmed", and a special error sound (see FIG. 31 (B)) can be output from the speaker 620. After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes other processes such as creating lamp data and updating various effect determination random numbers (S4305), and ends this process.

[Received command analysis process] As shown in FIG. 75, in the received command analysis process (S4301), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4401). If it has been received, the variable effect start processing described later is performed (S4402).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4403), and if has received it, performs a variation effect end process (S4404). In the variation effect end process (S4404), the variation stop command is analyzed, and the variation effect end command for ending the variation effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 based on the analysis result.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4405), and if so, performs an opening effect selection process (S4406). In the opening effect selection process (S4406), the opening command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, the opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4407), and if so, performs a round effect selection process (S4408). In the round effect selection process (S4408), the round designation command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4409), and if so, performs an ending effect selection process (S4410). In the ending effect selection process (S4410), the ending command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value designation command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4411), and if has received it, performs a set value flag change process (S4412). In the set value flag change process (S4412), the set value flag 125 of the effect RAM 124 is set based on the set value information included in the set value specification command. For example, if the setting value specification command contains the information of the setting value "1", the setting value flag 125 should be set to "1", and the setting value specification command should include the information of the setting value "6". If so, the set value flag 125 is set to "6". As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 can grasp the current set value.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the effect control microcomputer 121 initializes the effect RAM 124 (setting value flag 125) in step S4002 (see FIG. 71) described above, the effect control microcomputer 121 is currently based on the received setting value specification command. It is possible to grasp the set value in. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to execute the symbol setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting mode transition command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4413), and if has received it, performs a setting mode transition effect process (S4414). In the setting mode transition effect processing (S4414), the setting mode transition effect command for displaying the setting changing image SH shown in FIG. 27B is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting mode transition effect command displays the setting-changing image SH on the display screen 50a.

Further, in the setting mode transition effect processing (S4414), the sound data for outputting the sound "the setting can be changed" (see FIG. 26B) is set in the predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data outputs the voice "settings can be changed" from the speaker 620. Further, in the setting mode transition effect processing (S4414), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emitting mode (see FIG. 26B) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. Set to. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special first light emitting mode. As described above, the display of the image SH during the setting change, the voice saying "the setting can be changed", and the light emission in the special first light emission mode allow the setting changer to shift to the setting change mode and set arbitrarily. It is possible to understand that the value can be changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value change command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4415), and if has received it, performs a set value change effect process (S4416). In the set value change effect process (S4416), the set value change effect command for displaying the set value change image YG shown in FIGS. 27 (C) and 27 (D) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting value change effect command displays the setting value change image YG on the display screen 50a on top of the setting changing image SH (in a layered manner). As a result, it is possible to make the setting value changing image YG easier to recognize than the setting changing image SH, and to give priority to the situation where the setting value is changed.

Further, in the set value change effect process (S4416), the sound data for outputting the sound "the set value has been changed" (see FIG. 27 (C) or FIG. 27 (D)) is specified in the effect RAM 124. Set in the storage area of. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data outputs the voice "the set value has been changed" from the speaker 620. Further, in the set value change effect processing (S4416), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emission mode (see FIG. 27 (C) or FIG. 27 (D)) is used for the effect. It is set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 124. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special second light emitting mode. As a result of the above, the display of the setting value change image YG, the voice saying "the setting value has been changed", and the light emission in the special second light emission mode, not only the setting changer but also the employees of the surrounding amusement park. It is possible for the staff to understand the situation where the set value has been changed.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting mode end command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4417), and if has received it, performs a setting mode end effect process (S4418). In the setting mode end effect process (S4418), the set value confirmation effect command for displaying the set value confirmation image SK shown in FIG. 27 (F) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the setting value confirmation effect command has the setting shown in FIG. 27 (F) from the display of the setting changing image SH shown in FIG. 27 (E) on the display screen 50a. Switch to the display of the value confirmation image SK.

Further, in the setting mode end effect processing (S4418), the sound data for outputting the sound "the set value has been confirmed" (see FIG. 27 (F)) is set in the predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the voice CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the voice data outputs the voice "The set value has been confirmed" from the speaker 620. Further, in the setting mode end effect processing (S1418), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emission mode (see FIG. 27 (F)) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. Set to. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special third light emitting mode. As a result, not only the setting changer but also the employees of the surrounding amusement parks can be displayed by displaying the set value confirmed image SK, the voice saying "the set value has been confirmed", and the light emission in the special third light emitting mode. Also, it is possible to grasp the situation where the set value is fixed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an error command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4419), and if so, performs error mode notification processing (S4420). .. In the error mode notification process (S4420), the operation suggestion effect command for displaying the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 31B is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 that has received the operation suggestion effect command displays the operation suggestion image SE shown in FIG. 31B on the display screen 50a.

Further, in the error mode notification process (S4420), audio data for outputting a special error sound (see FIG. 31B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. As a result, the audio CPU 149 of the image control board 140 that has received the audio data outputs a special error sound from the speaker 620. Further, in the error mode notification process (S4420), the lamp data for causing the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode (see FIG. 31B) is set in a predetermined storage area of the effect RAM 124. do. As a result, the sub-drive board 162 that has received the lamp data causes the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 to emit light in a special error light emission mode. As described above, the display of the operation suggestion image SE, the special error sound, and the light emission in the special error light emission mode indicate that the employee of the amusement park is in the error mode, that is, the set value is set. It is possible to understand that it is not.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a setting suggestion condition establishment command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4421), and if so, turns on the setting suggestion condition establishment flag (S4422). The setting suggestion condition establishment flag is a flag indicating that the number of shot balls has become a multiple of 10,000 shots such as 10,000 shots, 20,000 shots, 30,000 shots, 40,000 shots, 50,000 shots, and 60,000 shots.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an error detection command has been received from the game control board 100 (S4423), and if so, performs error notification processing (S4424). ).

The error notification process (S4424) is fraudulently performed by using the display screen 50a, the speaker 620, the frame lamp 212, or the panel lamp 54 based on the reception of the error detection command (see FIG. 38) transmitted from the main control board 80. This is a process for notifying an abnormality. In the error notification process (S4424), first, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the received error detection command. As shown in FIG. 38, the error detection command includes information indicating what kind of error detection has been performed.

If the analyzed error detection command is magnetically detected, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H11H" (see FIG. 38), the red background image display command is sent to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set. Subsequently, the first error display command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the red background image display command and the first error display command are transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140, together with the red background, "Error 1, magnetic detection" as shown in FIG. 38. The first error character image indicating the characters "Abnormal, please turn on the power again" is displayed on the display screen 50a. From this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation where the magnetic detection abnormality has occurred and the power must be turned on again. Further, the game stop voice data is set in a predetermined voice data buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, since the game stop sound is output from the speaker 620, it is possible to make the player who is performing the illegal act by magnetism know that the game cannot be continued by hearing. Further, the white frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a white light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. Therefore, the surroundings are made aware that a magnetic detection abnormality has occurred even in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 212 and the panel lamp 54. It is possible.

Further, if the analyzed error detection command is one in which the exit side illegal passage detection of the first large winning opening 14 is performed, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H12H" (see FIG. 38), the first is 2 Set the error display command in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the second error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 has a second error indicating the characters "Error 2, Large winning opening abnormal discharge" as shown in FIG. 38. The character image is displayed on the display screen 50a. With this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation where the abnormal discharge of the large winning opening is occurring. The error audio data is set in the predetermined audio data buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, an error sound is output from the speaker 620. Further, the green frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a green light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off.

Further, if the analyzed error detection command is one in which radio wave detection is performed, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H13H" (see FIG. 38), the third error display command is output to the effect RAM 124. Set in the buffer. When the third error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 has a third error character image indicating the characters "Error 3, illegal radio wave detection" as shown in FIG. 38. Is displayed on the display screen 50a. With this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation where illegal radio wave detection is occurring. The error audio data is set in the predetermined audio data buffer of the effect RAM 124. As a result, an error sound is output from the speaker 620. Further, the green frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a green light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off.

Further, if the analyzed error detection command is one in which door opening detection is performed, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H14H" (see FIG. 38), the fourth error display command is issued to the effect RAM 124. Set in the output buffer. When the fourth error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 indicates the character "Error 4, the door is open" as shown in FIG. 38. The error character image is displayed on the display screen 50a. With this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation in which the gaming machine frame 2 is open. Further, the door opening audio data is set in a predetermined audio data buffer of the staging RAM 124. As a result, after the voice "The door is open" is output once from the speaker 620, there is no sound. Further, the yellow frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a yellow light emitting mode, and the entire board lamp 54 is turned off. Therefore, the gaming machine frame 2 is open in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54. It is possible to grasp.

If the analyzed error detection command is vibration detected, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H15H" (see FIG. 38), the fifth error display command is output to the effect RAM 124. Set in the buffer. When the fifth error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 has a fifth error character image indicating the characters "Error 5, vibration detection abnormality" as shown in FIG. 38. Is displayed on the display screen 50a. With this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation where the vibration detection abnormality has occurred. When vibration is detected, fraudulent notification is not performed except for displaying the fifth error image on the display screen 50a. This is because vibration detection is used for other error detection in consideration of the fact that vibration may be intentionally generated by contact, etc., in addition to the case where vibration is intentionally generated by the player (illegal act). This is because the severity of fraudulent activity is lower than that of.

Further, if the analyzed error detection command is one in which the electric chew abnormality winning detection is performed, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H16H" (see FIG. 38), the sixth error display command is used for directing. Set in the output buffer of RAM 124. When the sixth error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 has a sixth error character indicating the characters "Error 6, Electric Chu Abnormal Winning" as shown in FIG. 38. The image EH is displayed on the display screen 50a (see FIG. 41 (B)). With this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation where the electric chew abnormal prize is occurring. Further, the blue frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124. Further, the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off. In this embodiment, the display of the sixth error character image EH, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire board lamp 54 is turned off for 10 seconds.

Further, if the analyzed error detection command is one in which the large winning opening illegal winning detection is performed, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H17H" (see FIG. 38), the seventh error display command is produced. Set in the output buffer of the RAM 124. When the seventh error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 indicates a seventh error indicating the characters "Error 7, Large winning opening abnormal winning" as shown in FIG. 38. The character image is displayed on the display screen 50a. With this display, it is possible to let the surroundings know the situation where the big winning opening abnormal winning is occurring. The blue frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124. Further, the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off.

Further, if the analyzed error detection command is one in which unauthorized passage detection in a specific area is performed, that is, if the error detection command indicates "E1H18H" (see FIG. 38), the eighth error display command is used for directing. Set in the output buffer of RAM 124. When the eighth error display command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the effect CPU 122 of the image control board 140 has an eighth error character indicating the characters "Error 8, specific area abnormal passage" as shown in FIG. 38. The image is displayed on the display screen 50a. With this display, it is possible to make the surroundings aware of the situation where abnormal passage through a specific area is occurring. The blue frame lamp data is set in the predetermined frame lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124. Further, the panel lamp data set in the predetermined panel lamp data buffer of the effect RAM 124 is cleared. As a result, the entire frame lamp 212 emits light in a blue light emitting mode, and the entire panel lamp 54 is turned off.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs, as another process (S4425), a process based on a received command other than the above command (for example, a process for performing an effect associated with a variation display of a normal symbol). Then, the received command analysis process (S4301) is completed.

[Variation effect start process] As shown in FIG. 77, in the variation effect start process (S4402), the effect control microcomputer 121 first analyzes the variation start command (S4501). The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 19) and information on the special figure stop symbol data based on the determination of a jackpot or the like. Next, the effect symbol selection process described later is executed (S4502), and subsequently, the variable effect pattern selection process described later is executed (S4503).

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the advance notice effect selection process (S4504). As a result, the content of the advance notice effect such as the so-called step-up advance notice effect and the chance-up advance notice effect is determined. Next, the drive data setting process for setting the drive data according to the selected variation effect pattern is executed (S4505).

After that, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the selected effect symbol, the variation effect pattern, and the variation effect start command for starting the variation effect in the preview effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 (S4506), and changes. Ends the production start process (S4402). When the variation effect start command set in step S1506 is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142 and displays the image display device 50. A variable effect is performed on the screen 50a.

[Staging symbol selection process] The staging symbol selection process (S4502) is a process for determining the staging symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 to be finally stopped and displayed in the variable staging effect. As shown in FIG. 78, in the effect symbol selection process (S4502), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether the information of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 19) indicates a loss (S4601). If it indicates a loss (YES in S4601), then the loss effect symbol EZ is determined using the loss effect symbol lottery table based on the set value flag 125 (S4602). The determined loss effect symbol EZ is the effect symbol EZ that is stopped and displayed at the end of the three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 indicating the loss mode. Following step S4602, two staging symbols EZ excluding the lost staging symbol EZ are determined by lottery using a staging symbol lottery table (not shown) based on the variation pattern, and this process is completed.

As described above, for example, if the set value flag 125 indicates "6", the lost effect symbol random number is acquired, and the lost effect symbol random number is generated using the lost effect symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 35 (F). judge. In this case, since the sixth effect symbol EZf is easily determined as the loss effect symbol EZ, the execution frequency of the symbol setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 36 (B) is high. As a result, it is possible to make the player guess that the set value is "6" and to be interested in the loss mode of the staging pattern EZ.

On the other hand, in step S4601, if the fluctuation pattern information does not indicate a loss (NO in S4601), it means that the jackpot has been won and the process proceeds to step S4604. In this case, the three effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (doublet) are determined by lottery using an effect symbol lottery table for jackpots (not shown) based on the variation pattern (S1604). , Finish this process.

[Variable staging pattern selection process] The variable staging pattern selection process (S4503) is a process for determining a variable staging pattern, which is the content of the variable staging. Once the variable staging pattern is determined, the time of the staging effect, the variable display mode of the staging pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the content of the set value suggestion effect, SW The details of the content of the variable effect, which includes the presence / absence of the effect (effect button effect), the content of the SW effect, the effect development configuration, the type of the background of the effect pattern, etc., will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the variation effect pattern selection process (S4503), the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether the information of the variation pattern (see FIG. 19) indicates SP reach loss (S1701). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation patterns are P3 and P13 (see FIG. 19). If it indicates SP reach loss (YES in S4701), then it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion condition establishment flag is ON (S4702). If it is ON (YES in S4702), the setting suggestion condition establishment flag is turned OFF (S4703), and the process proceeds to step S4704. In short, the case of proceeding to step S4704 is an SP reach loss, and the number of shot balls exceeds a multiple of 10,000 shots.

In step S4704, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value flag is "4", "5", or "6". If it is "4", "5", or "6" (YES in S4704), a lottery is performed based on the variation pattern using a variation effect pattern table for which there is a high setting suggestion effect (not shown). As a result, the SP reach loss fluctuation effect pattern with the high setting suggestion effect is determined, and this process is completed. In this way, when the SP reach loss fluctuation effect pattern with the high setting suggestion effect is determined, the battle effect shown in FIG. 37 (A) ⇒ the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 37 (B) ⇒ the effect shown in FIG. 37 (C). After the stop display in the loss mode of the symbol EZ, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), the high setting suggestion effect showing the phoenix image FT is executed. As a result, the player who is disappointed by the SP reach loss is made to grasp the phoenix image FT, and it is as if the high setting (setting value is "4" or "5" or "6") is acquired by the resurrection. It is possible to give a feeling of exhilaration.

On the other hand, when it is not SP reach loss (NO in S4701), when the setting condition suggestion flag is not ON (NO in S4702), and when the set value is not set high ("4" or "5" or "6") ( For NO) on S4704, proceed to step S4706. In step S1706, a lottery is performed using a variation effect pattern table for no high setting suggestion effect (not shown) based on the variation pattern. As a result, the variable effect pattern without the high setting suggestion effect is determined, and this process is completed.

14. Effect of this embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, six types of setting values (setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", and setting value "4" are used. , Setting value "5", setting value "6", see FIG. 17), the set setting value "1" may be changed to the setting value "6". In this case, the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D corresponding to the set value "6" from the threshold value (20 pieces, see FIG. 39) of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D corresponding to the set value "1" in the non-time saving state. Will be changed to the threshold value (10, see FIG. 39). As a result, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D according to the changed set value is changed, so that the detection omission or the second start by the second start port sensor 12a in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose set value can be changed is changed. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection by the mouth sensor 12a. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose set value can be changed, it is possible to appropriately determine the abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 by the gaming control microcomputer 101.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, when the set value is changed to "1", the second special symbol is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12 rather than the set value "6". The probability of winning a big hit is low in the lottery (see Fig. 17). In addition, when the set value "1" is set, the number of lottery of the second special symbol increases before the big hit is won compared to the case where the set value "6" is set, so the second starting port 12 is reached. The number of times the game ball is entered can be increased. Therefore, when the setting value is changed to "1", the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is changed to a higher threshold value (20 pieces, see FIG. 39) than when the setting value "6" is set. Become. On the other hand, when the set value is changed to "6", the probability of winning a big hit is higher in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12 than the set value "1". (See Fig. 17). Therefore, when the set value "6" is set, the number of lottery of the second special symbol before the big hit is won is smaller than when the set value "1" is set, so that the second starting port 12 is reached. The number of times the game ball is entered can be reduced. Therefore, when the setting value is changed to "6", the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is changed to a higher threshold value (10, see FIG. 39) than when the setting value "1" is set. Become. As a result, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is changed according to each set value, so that the set value can be changed. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection by the sensor 12a.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is reached by the game control microcomputer 101 from the end of the big hit game to the big hit winning in the next special symbol lottery. Therefore, an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 may be determined. As a result, the number of lottery of the second special symbol until the jackpot is won differs depending on the jackpot winning probability according to each set value, but by changing the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D according to each set value. From the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the jackpot in the next special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the detection omission by the second start port sensor 12a or the erroneous detection by the second start port sensor 12a. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately determine the abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 within a limited period from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the jackpot in the next special symbol lottery.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 2 executes the big hit game having a larger number of rounds than the lottery of the special figure 1, so that the big hit game advantageous to the player is executed. Is set to (see FIG. 15). As a result, depending on the jackpot winning probability according to each set value, the number of times that the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 12 and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed before the jackpot is won is different, but each set value. By changing the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D according to the above, it is possible to prevent the detection omission by the second starting port sensor 12a or the erroneous detection by the second starting port sensor 12a. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally insert a game ball into the electric chew 12D and win a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, and prevent the big hit game that is advantageous to the player from being executed.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the present embodiment, six types of setting values (setting value "1", setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value Of "6", see FIG. 17), even if the set value is changed to another set value and the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D corresponding to the set value is changed, the image display device. Using the 50, the frame lamp 212, and the board lamp 54, it is possible to notify that the game control microcomputer 101 has determined that the electric chew abnormality has been won (see FIGS. 40 and 41 (B)). ). As a result, even if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 whose set value can be changed is changed to another set value and the threshold value of the number of winnings of the electric chew 12D is changed, the pachinko gaming machine is appropriately used. It is possible to notify that an abnormality has occurred in PY1.

15. Modification example The modification example will be described below. In the description of the modified example, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Of course, the configurations according to the modified examples may be appropriately combined and configured. Further, the technical features in the above-described embodiment and the following modified examples can be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in the present specification.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 corresponds to the "predetermined condition", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are not used as entry ports, but are gates through which game balls can pass, and the fact that the game balls pass through those gates corresponds to the "predetermined condition". Is also good.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot game corresponds to the "special game state", but the game is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 may correspond to the "special gaming state".

In the above embodiment, the second start port sensor 12a corresponds to the "detection means", but is not limited thereto. For example, the first start port sensor 11a may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the first large winning opening sensor 14a may correspond to the "detection means". In addition, the second large winning opening sensor 15a may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the specific area sensor 16a may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the non-specific region sensor 17a may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the door open detection sensor 200 may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the magnetic detection sensor 201 may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the radio wave detection sensor 202 may correspond to the "detection means". Further, the impact detection sensor 203 may correspond to the "detection means".

In the above embodiment, the set value "1" corresponds to the first set value and the set value "6" corresponds to the second set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any of the setting values "2" other than the setting value "1", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", the setting value "5", or the setting value "6" is the first setting value. It may correspond to the set value. Further, any of the setting value "1", the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", or the setting value "5" other than the setting value "6" is the second setting value. It may correspond to the set value.

In the above embodiment, the threshold value (20 pieces) corresponding to the set value “1” shown in FIG. 39, the threshold value (18 pieces) corresponding to the set value “2”, the threshold value (16 pieces) corresponding to the set value “3”, Six types of thresholds including the threshold value (14 pieces) corresponding to the set value "4", the threshold value (12 pieces) corresponding to the set value "5", and the threshold value (10 pieces) corresponding to the set value "6" are ". It corresponds to "multiple thresholds", but is not limited to this. For example, five or less types of threshold values may correspond to "plurality of threshold values". Assuming that there are three types of threshold values of 10, 16 and 20, the threshold value may be set to 10 when the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". In this case, the threshold value may be 16 when the set value "3" or the set value "4" is applicable, and 20 threshold values may be set when the set value "5" or the set value "6" is applicable.

In the above embodiment, 20 threshold values corresponding to the set value "1" correspond to the "first threshold value", and 10 threshold values corresponding to the set value "6" correspond to the "second threshold value". Equivalent to. However, it is not limited to this. For example, 12 thresholds corresponding to the set value "2", 14 thresholds corresponding to the set value "3", 16 thresholds corresponding to the set value "4", and the set value "5". It may correspond to 18 corresponding threshold values and 20 threshold values corresponding to the set value "6". Further, the threshold value corresponding to the setting value "1" is 10, the threshold value corresponding to the setting value "2" is 12, the threshold value corresponding to the setting value "3" is 14, and the setting value is "4". It may correspond to 16 corresponding threshold values and 18 threshold values corresponding to the set value "5".

In the above embodiment, the number of game balls that have won the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (see FIG. 39) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery, so that the game is controlled. Although it is determined by the microcomputer 101 that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of game balls won in the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (see FIG. 39) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery, other information (for example, see FIG. 39). Whether or not the game control microcomputer 101 detects an abnormal winning of the electric chew by referring to the opening time of the electric chew 12D in a non-time saving state (0.2 seconds, the number of winnings per time (see FIG. 20)). May be determinable.

In the above embodiment, the number of game balls that have won the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (see FIG. 39) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery, so that the game is controlled. Although it is determined by the microcomputer 101 that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of game balls that have won the electric chew 12D has reached the threshold value (see FIG. 39) from the end of the big hit game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery, so that the game control microcomputer 101 Therefore, it may not be determined that the electric chew abnormality winning detection is detected.

In the above embodiment, the fact that the number of game balls that have won the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (see FIG. 39) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery is the "detection means". It corresponds to "the value detected by the above reaches a predetermined threshold value", but is not limited to this. For example, when the number of game balls winning in the first large winning opening 14 or the second large winning opening 15 reaches a threshold value (for example, 10), "the detection value by the detection means reaches a predetermined threshold value". May be equivalent to. In this case, the threshold values may be different for each of the six types of setting values, such as 10 for the setting value "1" and 12 for the setting value "2".

In the above embodiment, the fact that the number of game balls that have won the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value (see FIG. 39) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning in the next special symbol lottery is the "detection means". It corresponds to "the value detected by the above reaches a predetermined threshold value", but is not limited to this. For example, the fact that the number of game balls that have passed through the specific area 16 reaches a threshold value (for example, 5) may correspond to "the value detected by the detection means reaches a predetermined threshold value". In this case, the threshold values may be different for each of the six types of setting values, such as 5 for the setting value "1" and 6 for the setting value "2".

In the above embodiment, the second starting port 12 corresponds to the “ball entry port”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first starting port 11 may correspond to the "ball entry port". Further, the first large winning opening 14 may correspond to the "entry opening". In addition, the second big winning opening 15 may correspond to the "entry opening". Further, the general winning opening 10 may correspond to the "ball entry opening".

In the above embodiment, the threshold value (10 pieces) corresponding to the set value "6" corresponding to the "second threshold value" is more than the threshold value (20 pieces) corresponding to the set value "1" corresponding to the "first threshold value". ) Was lower, but it is not limited to this. For example, the "first threshold" may be higher than the "second threshold". Further, the "second threshold value" and the "first threshold value" may have the same value.

In the above mode, any of the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6" in the time saving state. When the set value is set, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is ∞, but the threshold value is not limited to this. For example, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D in the time saving state may be another value. However, even though the player has made the electric chew 12D win the game ball in a short time state and is playing the game properly, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is reached and the electric chew abnormal winning is detected. It should not be determined by the game control microcomputer 101.

In the above mode, any of the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6" in the time saving state. When the set value is set, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is ∞, but the threshold value is not limited to this. For example, in the time saving state, for each set value among the set value "1", the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6". The threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D may be different. In this case, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value "1" is set in the time saving state is 40, and to the electric chew 12D when the setting value "2" is set in the time saving state. The threshold of the number of winnings is 38, the threshold of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D when the set value "3" is set in the time saving state is 36, and the setting value "4" is set in the time saving state. The threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is 34, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is 32 when the set value "5" is set in the time saving state, and the set value "6" is set in the time saving state. ] Is set, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D may be 30. However, even though the player has made the electric chew 12D win the game ball in a short time state and is playing the game properly, the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is reached and the electric chew abnormal winning is detected. It should not be determined by the game control microcomputer 101.

In the above form, the period from the end of the big hit game to the winning of the big hit in the next special symbol lottery corresponds to "from the end of the special game state to the start of the special game state", but it is limited to this. There is no. For example, from the end of the big hit game to the time when the big hit is won in the next special symbol lottery and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it corresponds to "from the end of the special game state to the start of the special game state". You can do it. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot is won in the next special symbol lottery, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution of the jackpot game starts. It may be equivalent to "up to". In addition, the period from the end of the time saving state after the end of the big hit game to the winning of the big hit in the next special symbol lottery corresponds to "from the end of the special game state to the start of the special game state". May be. In addition, from the end of the time-saving state when the big hit game ends to the time when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the next special symbol lottery, the "special game state after the end of the special game state" It may be equivalent to "until the start of". In addition, after the end of the time-saving state in which the jackpot game ends and the transition is completed, the jackpot is won in the next special symbol lottery, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution of the jackpot game starts until the "special game state". It may correspond to "from the end of the game to the start of the special game state".

In the above embodiment, during the period when the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and the electric chew abnormal winning detection can be determined by the game control microcomputer 101, the next special symbol lottery is performed after the jackpot game is completed. Until the big hit was won (from the end of the special game state to the start of the special game state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, during the period when the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and the game control microcomputer 101 can determine the detection of the electric chew abnormality winning, the power is cut off after the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on. It may be up to. In addition, during the period when the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and it is possible to judge the electric chew abnormality winning detection by the game control microcomputer 101, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on and then to the electric chew 12D. It may be until the number of winnings reaches the threshold value. The period during which the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and the game control microcomputer 101 can determine the detection of the electric chew abnormality winning can be appropriately changed.

In the above embodiment, during the period when the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and the electric chew abnormal winning detection can be determined by the game control microcomputer 101, the next special symbol lottery is performed after the jackpot game is completed. There was only one type until the big hit was won. However, it is not limited to this. For example, during the period when the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and it is possible to judge the electric chew abnormal winning detection by the game control microcomputer 101, the big hit is won by the next special symbol lottery after the end of the big hit game. There may be two types, one is until the winning, and the other is from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on until the power is cut off. In this case, the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D may reach the threshold value in either of the two types, and the game control microcomputer 101 may determine the electric chew abnormal winning detection. In addition, during the period when the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value and it is possible to judge the electric chew abnormal winning detection by the game control microcomputer 101, the big hit is won by the next special symbol lottery after the end of the big hit game. There may be two types, one is until the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on and the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D reaches the threshold value. In this case, the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D may reach the threshold value in either of the two types, and the game control microcomputer 101 may determine the electric chew abnormal winning detection.

In the above embodiment, the image display device 50, the panel lamp 54, and the frame lamp 212 correspond to the "abnormality notification means", but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, only one of the image display device 50, the panel lamp 54, or the frame lamp 212 may correspond to the "abnormality notification means". Further, only two types of the image display device 50, the panel lamp 54, or the frame lamp 212 may correspond to the "abnormality notification means". Further, other than the image display device 50, the panel lamp 54, and the frame lamp 212, the first special figure display 81a, the second special figure display 81b, the normal figure display 82, the first special figure hold display 83a, and the second. The special figure holding display 83b, the normal drawing holding display 84, the panel movable body 55k, the speaker 620, and the like may correspond to the "abnormality notification means".

Further, in the above embodiment, magnetic detection, detection of illegal passage through the exit of the first major winning opening, radio wave detection, detection of door opening, vibration detection, detection of abnormal electric chew winning, detection of unauthorized passing through the large winning opening, or detection of illegal passage in a specific area are performed. In this case, the error notification shown in FIG. 38 was performed, but the error notification shown in FIG. 38 is only an example. For example, when the first big winning opening illegal passage detection, radio wave detection, door opening detection, vibration detection, electric chew abnormal winning detection, big winning opening illegal winning detection, or specific area illegal passage detection is performed, the display screen The background image displayed on the 50a may be changed. In addition, when magnetic detection, illegal passage detection of the first large winning opening exit, radio wave detection, door opening detection, vibration detection, electric chew abnormal winning detection, large winning opening illegal winning detection, or specific area illegal passage detection is performed, The character image displayed on the display screen 50a is not limited to the character image shown in FIG. 38, and may be another character image that notifies each abnormality. In addition, when vibration detection, electric chew abnormality winning detection, large winning opening illegal winning detection, or specific area illegal passage detection is performed, the speaker 620 may output a voice notifying each abnormality. .. In addition, when magnetic detection, illegal passage detection at the exit of the first major winning opening, radio wave detection, door opening detection, abnormal winning detection for electric chew, unauthorized winning detection at the large winning opening, or unauthorized passage detection in a specific area is performed, the frame lamp 212 The lighting color of is not limited to the lighting color shown in FIG. 38. Further, when the vibration is detected, the frame lamp 212 and the board lamp 54 may be changed.

In the above embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 2 is set so that the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed as compared with the lottery of the special figure 1, but the lottery is not limited to this (FIG. 15). reference). For example, the lottery of the special figure 1 may be set so that the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed rather than the lottery of the special figure 2.

In the above embodiment, the lottery of the special figure 2 is set to execute the big hit game having a large number of rounds than the lottery of the special figure 1, so that the big hit game advantageous to the player is executed. , But not limited to this (see FIG. 15). For example, since the lottery of the special figure 2 has a larger number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game than the lottery of the special figure 1, the big hit game that is advantageous to the player may be set to be executed. ..

The small hit winning probability of the special figure 1 in the above embodiment was about 1/19 (see FIG. 17), but the probability is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the probability of winning a small hit in Special Figure 2 was 1/2 (see FIG. 17), but the probability is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the probability of winning in the lottery of ordinary symbols in this embodiment is about 1/3 (see FIG. 18B), but the probability is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, if it is determined by the game control microcomputer 101 that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected, the winning of the electric chew 12D is invalidated, but the present invention is not limited to this (see FIG. 38). For example, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the electric chew abnormality winning detection is detected, the game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 may be stopped.

The second starting port valid counter of the above embodiment is a subtraction method for the number of valid winnings to the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the jackpot in the next special symbol lottery. It was a counter to count. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be a counter that counts the number of valid winnings to the second starting port 12 (electric chew 12D) by an addition method.

In the above embodiment, when the value of the second start port effective counter becomes "0", that is, when the threshold value of the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D is reached, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the electric chew abnormality winning is detected. , Not limited to this. For example, from the end of the big hit game to the big hit winning in the next special symbol lottery, the game RAM 104 stores information on the number of winning balls in the second starting port 12 accumulated by the game control microcomputer 101. A winning number storage unit may be provided. In this case, when the total number of game balls winning in the second starting port 12 stored in the winning number storage unit reaches the threshold value of the winning number to the electric chew 12D, the electric chew by the game control microcomputer 101 It may be determined that an abnormal winning is detected. The information regarding the number of winnings of the electric chew 12D stored in the winning number storage unit may be cleared when the big hit is won in the next special symbol lottery. Further, the information regarding the number of winnings of the electric chew 12D stored in the winning number storage unit in the time saving state may be cleared when the number of electric support times becomes 0 and the non-time saving state is reached. ..

In the above embodiment, the high base state is configured to end when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 99 times, but the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol as the end condition of the high base state can be arbitrarily changed. It is possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, after the setting change mode is completed, as a suggestion effect image suggesting the setting value, a phoenix image FT suggesting a high setting value (see FIG. 37 (D)) and a numerical part when showing the loss mode are shown. There was an effect symbol EZ suggesting a set value. However, a suggestion effect image other than the above may be displayed. That is, other than the high setting suggestion effect and the symbol setting suggestion effect described above may be executed. For example, a suggestion effect image suggesting a set value may be displayed during the execution of the customer waiting effect indicating that the game is not in progress.

Further, in the above embodiment, the high setting suggestion effect is executed when the condition that the SP reach is lost and the condition that the number of shot balls from the power-on reaches a multiple of 10,000 shots (predetermined number of balls) are satisfied. bottom. However, it may be executed when only one of the two conditions is satisfied, and the above conditions can be changed as appropriate. For example, when it is a big hit or when it is decided by a predetermined lottery, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, the high setting suggestion effect can be executed when the set value is "4", "5", or "6", but can be executed only when the set value is "6", for example. However, it is possible to change the setting value as appropriate. Further, the high setting suggestion effect was executed after the effect symbol EZ was stopped and displayed in a lost manner (see FIGS. 37 (C) (D)), but the execution timing of the high setting suggestion effect (display timing of the suggestion effect image) was It can be changed as appropriate. For example, the high setting suggestion effect may be executed before the battle defeat effect shown in FIG. 36 (B) is executed. Further, instead of the high setting suggestion effect, the low setting suggestion effect may be executed when the set value is "1", "2", or "3".

Further, in the above embodiment, the symbol setting suggestion effect is executed when the pattern is lost. However, the execution condition of the symbol setting suggestion effect is not limited to the case of loss, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when it is a big hit or when it is decided by a predetermined lottery, the symbol setting suggestion effect may be executed. Further, in the symbol setting suggestion effect, the set value is suggested by the numerical portion of the effect symbol EZ indicating the loss mode, but the set value may be suggested by other than the effect symbol EZ. For example, the set value may be suggested by the numerical part attached to the character image or the item image. Further, the set value may be suggested (the suggestion effect image is displayed) at a timing different from the timing when the effect symbol EZ is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 36 (B)).

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits the set value designation command to the effect control microcomputer 121 at the following three timings. That is, when the first timing for processing step S010 when the power is turned on, the second timing for processing step S037 when the set value is changed, and the set value is determined with the end of the setting change mode. There was a third timing to process step S040. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit the setting value designation command at a timing other than the above, for example, even after the setting change mode ends. In this case, for example, the set value specification command may be transmitted at the start of the first fluctuation after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the setting value is specified only when the game control microcomputer 101 manages the execution of the setting value suggestion effect (display of the suggestion effect image) and causes the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the set value suggestion effect. You may send a command.

Further, in the above embodiment, even when the information related to the game stored in the game RAM 104 is erased based on the operation of pressing the RAM clear switch 191, the set value information stored in the set value information storage unit 107 is erased. I tried not to. However, when the information related to the game is deleted, the set value information may also be deleted. In this case, for example, only when the setting change mode transition operation is performed, the information related to the game and the setting value information may be deleted immediately after the power is turned on, and then the setting change mode may be shifted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed in a state where the set value is not set because the control related to the game is executed even though the set value information is not stored. be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the base can be displayed on the 7-segment display 300. However, the 7-segment display 300 may be capable of displaying information related to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 other than the base. For example, as information related to the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the payout (total number of prize balls-number of fired balls) or the payout rate may be displayed. The payout rate is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of the accessory to the total number of prize balls acquired from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. And in the output rate, there are a bonus ratio and a continuous bonus ratio. The bonus ratio is used to operate all prizes, including ordinary electric bonuses (electric chew 12D) and special electric bonuses (1st prize-winning device 14D, 2nd prize-winning device 15D), out of the total number of prize balls. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls for the character) obtained based on the above. The continuous bonus ball ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of continuous prize balls) obtained based on the continuous operation of the special electric bonus ball among the total number of prize balls. In other words, the continuous bonus ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based only on the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls.

Further, in the above embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process based on the entry into the first start opening 11, a jackpot game in which the second jackpot 15 is opened as a type 1 jackpot is executed, and the second start is performed. When a game ball is entered into the first big winning opening 14 opened in the executed small hit game by winning a small hit in the big hit judgment process based on the ball entering the mouth, the second type of big hit is the second. It was a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer in which a big hit game in which the large winning opening 15 was opened was executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the special figure display 81 and the normal figure display 82 of the abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 may be provided with a probability fluctuation function, respectively. The state in which the probability fluctuation function of the special figure display 81 is operating may be referred to as a “high probability state”. In the high probability state, the jackpot probability may be higher than in the normal probability state. In this case, it may be configured as a gaming machine in which the transition to the high probability state is determined based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. Further, it may be configured as a so-called V probability machine (a gaming machine that controls to a high probability state based on the passage of a specific area (V area) in the large winning opening). Further, once controlled to a high probability state, it may be configured as a gaming machine (so-called probabilistic loop type gaming machine) in which control to the high probability state continues until the start of the next big hit game. Further, it may be configured as a so-called ST machine (game machine that cuts the number of probable changes) or a fall machine (game machine whose high probability state ends depending on the lottery result). Further, it may be configured as a Hanemono type gaming machine. That is, the invention shown in the present specification can be suitably adopted for a gaming machine having various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the gaming machine.

Further, the number of large winning openings (large winning devices) may be only one. It is a gaming machine equipped with a large winning opening and a large winning opening sensor that can detect a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening.

Further, in the above embodiment, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are acquired as random numbers (determination information) acquired based on the winning of the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, but one random number is used. And based on the random number, it may be decided whether or not it is a big hit, the type of hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of fluctuation pattern. That is, the number of random numbers to be acquired based on the starting prize and what is to be determined for each random number can be arbitrarily set.

Further, the type of the slot machine may be any type. In the case of a so-called normal machine (A type slot machine) that increases the number of medals earned by winning a big bonus or a regular bonus, the state in which a bonus such as a big bonus or a regular bonus is executed corresponds to a special gaming state. In addition, if it is a so-called ART machine or AT machine that increases the number of medals won during a special game period such as ART (assist replay time) or AT (assist time) that can frequently win small roles, the state during ART or AT. Corresponds to the special gaming state. In addition, in the normal machine, the control conditions for the special game state are a combination of symbols that triggers the transition to the big bonus and regular bonus on the activated winning line after winning the big bonus and regular bonus. It is derived and displayed as the display result of the reel. Further, in the ART machine and the AT machine, the control condition to the special game state is, for example, after winning the execution lottery of the ART or AT, the specified number of games is exhausted, and the activation timing of the ART or AT is reached. be.

16. Inventions Shown in the Above Embodiments The inventions of the following means are shown in the above-mentioned embodiments. In the description of the means described below, the corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described embodiment and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12) is satisfied, a predetermined determination process (special figure 2 jackpot determination process (step S172 shown in FIG. 54)). , Special figure 1 jackpot determination process (step S178 shown in FIG. 54)) draws a lottery to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, and if the determination process determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, it is possible to control a special gaming state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a gaming control means (gaming control microcomputer 101)
A detection means (second start port sensor 12a) capable of performing a predetermined detection is provided.
The game control means is
A plurality of setting values (settings) including a first setting value (setting value "1") and a second setting value (setting value "6") having a higher probability of being determined as a big hit in the determination process than the first setting value. One set value selected from the values "1", set value "2", set value "3", set value "4", set value "5", set value "6", see FIG. 17). Can be changed to
The value detected by the detection means reaches a predetermined threshold value (threshold value of the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state (10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 20), see FIG. 39). Based on this, it is possible to judge the abnormality in the game machine.
The threshold includes a plurality of thresholds (thresholds for the number of winnings to the electric chew 12D in the non-time saving state (10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 20), see FIG. 39).
When the game control means changes from the first set value to the second set value, the first threshold value among the plurality of threshold values (set value "1" in a non-time saving state is set to the electric chew 12D. From the threshold of the number of winnings (20), the second threshold different from the first threshold (setting value "6" in the non-time saving state, the threshold of the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D (10), FIG. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it may be changed to (see 39).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first set value is out of a plurality of set values including the first set value and the second set value having a higher probability of being determined as a big hit in a predetermined determination process than the first set value. When the set value is changed to the second set value, the detection value by the detection means may be changed from the first threshold value to the second threshold value different from the first threshold value among the plurality of threshold values. be. As a result, the threshold value is changed according to the changed set value, so that it is possible to prevent the detection omission by the detection means or the erroneous detection by the detection means in the gaming machine in which the set value can be changed. Therefore, in a gaming machine whose set value can be changed, it is possible to appropriately determine an abnormality in the gaming machine.

The invention according to means A2 is
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
A ball entry port (second starting port 12) is provided in the game area.
The predetermined condition is that the game ball enters the ball entrance.
The detection means
It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the entrance.
The second threshold value (set value "6" in the non-time saving state) is higher than the first threshold value (set value "1" in the non-time saving state, the threshold value of the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D (20 pieces), see FIG. 39). It is a gaming machine characterized in that the threshold value (10 pieces) of the number of winnings in the electric chew 12D, see FIG. 39) is lower.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the value is changed to the first set value, the probability of being determined as a big hit is lower than that of the second set value based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance. Since the number of lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the entry slot increases by the time it is determined, the threshold value is changed to the first threshold value higher than the second threshold value. On the other hand, when the value is changed to the second set value, there is a higher probability that it will be determined as a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance, so it will be entered before it is determined as a big hit. Since the number of lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the ball mouth is reduced, the threshold value is changed to a second threshold value lower than the first threshold value. As a result, the number of lottery that is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance is different depending on the probability that the jackpot is determined according to each set value. However, by changing the height of the threshold value according to each set value, it is possible to prevent detection omission by the detection means or erroneous detection by the detection means, and to more appropriately determine an abnormality in the gaming machine.

The invention according to means A3 is
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
A ball entry port (second starting port 12) is provided in the game area.
The predetermined condition is that the game ball enters the ball entrance.
The detection means
It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the entrance.
The game control means is
From the end of the special gaming state to the start of the next special gaming state (from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the jackpot with the next special symbol), based on the detection value by the detection means reaching the threshold value. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine an abnormality in the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the abnormality in the gaming machine is determined based on the fact that the detection value by the detecting means reaches the threshold value from the end of the special gaming state to the start of the next special gaming state. There is. As a result, the number of lottery that is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the entrance slot before the jackpot is determined depends on the probability that the jackpot is determined according to each set value. By changing the threshold value, it is possible to prevent detection omission by the detection means or erroneous detection by the detection means, and appropriately in the game machine within a limited period from the end of the special gaming state to the start of the next special gaming state. It becomes possible to judge the abnormality of.

The invention according to means A4 is
In the gaming machine according to means A2 or means A3,
The ball entrance is a variable ball opening (second) that can be changed into a first mode (closed state) and a second mode (open state) in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first mode. It is the starting port 12),
It is provided with another entry port (first starting opening 11) different from the variable entry port.
The game control means is
Based on the entry of the game ball into the other entry slot or the variable entry slot, a lottery for whether or not the ball is a big hit is performed in the determination process.
The detection means
It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the variable entry port.
Based on the entry of the game ball into the other entrance by the game control means, the game ball to the variable entrance is more than the special gaming state controlled by the determination process as a big hit. It is a gaming machine characterized in that a special gaming state in which a jackpot is determined and controlled by the determination process based on a ball entry is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, based on the entry of the game ball into another entrance, the ball can enter the variable entrance rather than the special gaming state which is determined to be a big hit and controlled. A special gaming state that is determined to be a big hit and controlled based on the jackpot is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the abnormality in the gaming machine is determined based on the detection value of the ball entering the variable ball entry port reaching a predetermined threshold value. As a result, the number of lottery that is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the variable entrance slot before the jackpot is determined depends on the probability that the jackpot is determined according to each set value. By changing the corresponding threshold value, it is possible to prevent detection omission by the detection means or erroneous detection by the detection means, and to more appropriately determine an abnormality in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being determined to be a big hit and controlled to a special game state based on the intentional entry of the game ball into the variable entrance port.

The invention according to means A5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The gaming machine is provided with an abnormality notifying means (image display device 50, frame lamp 212, board lamp 54) capable of notifying that an abnormality has been determined in the gaming machine by the gaming control means.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even when the threshold value is changed according to the changed set value, it may be notified that the abnormality in the gaming machine has been determined. As a result, in a gaming machine that can be changed to one set value from a plurality of set values, even if the threshold value is changed due to the change of the set value, it is notified that an abnormality has been appropriately performed. Is possible.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-35825, it is considered abnormal based on the fact that the number of gaming balls (detection value) detected by the detection sensor that detects the entry of the gate reaches the threshold value. Deciding. Further, some conventional gaming machines can arbitrarily change the probability of determining a jackpot in the jackpot determination process by changing the set value. However, in a gaming machine whose set value can be changed, if the threshold value of the detection value detected by the detection means capable of performing a predetermined detection is only one, the probability of determining a jackpot is changed. There is a possibility that the abnormality in the gaming machine cannot be properly determined by the detection by the detection means. Therefore, the inventions according to the means A1 to A5 have a higher probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination process than the first set value and the first set value for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-35825. It is possible to change to one selected setting value from a plurality of setting values including the second setting value, and the abnormality in the gaming machine is determined based on the fact that the detection value by the detection means reaches a predetermined threshold value. It is possible, and there are a plurality of threshold values, and when the game control means changes from the first set value to the second set value, the first threshold value among the plurality of threshold values is the first of the plurality of threshold values. The difference is that it may be changed to a second threshold that is different from the threshold of 1. This makes it possible to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of determining an abnormality in a gaming machine whose set value can be appropriately changed (effectively acting).

PY1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 11 ... 1st starting port 11a ... 1st starting port sensor 12 ... 2nd starting port 12a ... 2nd starting port sensor 14 ... 1st big winning opening 14a ... 1st big winning opening sensor 15 ... 2nd Large winning opening 15a ... Second winning opening sensor 16 ... Specific area 16a ... Specific area sensor 17 ... Non-specific area 17a ... Non-specific area sensor 50 ... Image display device 50a ... Display screen 54 ... Board lamp 100 ... Game control board 101 ... Game control microcomputer 102 ... Game CPU
104 ... Game RAM
120 ... Production control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer 200 ... Door open detection sensor 201 ... Magnetic detection sensor 202 ... Radio wave detection sensor 203 ... Impact detection sensor 212 ... Frame lamp 300 ... 7-segment display 620 ... Speaker

Claims (5)

Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for whether or not a jackpot is performed is performed in a predetermined determination process, and if the determination process determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, a gaming control means capable of controlling a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided. In the pachinko machine
Equipped with a detection means capable of performing a predetermined detection,
The game control means is
It is possible to change to one selected setting value from a plurality of setting values including the first setting value and the second setting value having a higher probability of being determined as a big hit in the determination process than the first setting value.
Based on the fact that the detection value by the detection means reaches a predetermined threshold value, it is possible to determine an abnormality in the gaming machine.
The threshold has a plurality of thresholds, and there are a plurality of thresholds.
When the game control means changes from the first set value to the second set value, the first threshold value is changed to a second threshold value different from the first threshold value among the plurality of threshold values. A gaming machine characterized by being able to be played. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
Equipped with an entrance in the game area,
The predetermined condition is that the game ball enters the ball entrance.
The detection means
It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the entrance.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second threshold value is lower than the first threshold value. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
Equipped with an entrance in the game area,
The predetermined condition is that the game ball enters the ball entrance.
The detection means
It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the entrance.
The game control means is
From the end of the special gaming state to the start of the next special gaming state, it is possible to determine an abnormality in the gaming machine based on the value detected by the detecting means reaching the threshold value. Machine. In the gaming machine according to claim 2 or claim 3.
The ball entrance is a variable ball opening that can be changed into a first aspect and a second aspect in which a game ball is easier to enter than the first aspect.
It has another entrance that is different from the variable entrance.
The game control means is
Based on the entry of the game ball into the other entry slot or the variable entry slot, a lottery for whether or not the ball is a big hit is performed in the determination process.
The detection means
It is possible to detect the entry of a game ball into the variable entry port.
Based on the entry of the game ball into the other entrance by the game control means, the game ball to the variable entrance is more than the special gaming state controlled by the determination process as a big hit. A gaming machine characterized in that a special gaming state controlled by determining a big hit in the determination process based on a ball entry is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an abnormality notifying means capable of notifying that an abnormality has been determined in the gaming machine by the gaming control means.

Images